2008 Accord Sedan - Service Express

2008 Accord Sedan

Owner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.© 2007 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31 TA5 6000

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Accord Sedan. You may finddescriptions of equipment and features thatare not on your particular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur enfrançais, veuillez demander à votreconcessionnaire de commander lenuméro de pièce 33TA5C00 .

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０７／０６／１５　１１：０８：０５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０００１　

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

０７／０６／１５　１１：０８：１１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０００２　

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

０７／０６／１５　１１：０８：１５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０００３　

－

－

－－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

on the vehicle.Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０７／０６／１５　１１：０８：２５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０００４　

０７／０６／１５　１１：０８：２８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０００５　

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column)

( )

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

climate control, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, HomeLink, and other convenience items

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

..........................................Instruments and Controls . 53

...............Features . 119

.......................................................................Before Driving . 259

.........................................................................................Driving . 279

.................................................Maintenance . 305

...............................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 355

..............................................Technical Information . 381

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 399

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 403

IND

EX

1

０７／０６／１５　１１：０８：３７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０００６　

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

How to operate the climate controlsystem, the audio system, and otherconvenience features.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Technical Information

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

Before Driving

Driving

Maintenance

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Overview of Contents

2

０７／０６／１５　１１：０８：５５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０００７　

＊

＊

＊＊

If equipped:


Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS(P.102)

(P.79)

(P.103)

CLOCKCOMPASS

PASSENGER’SFRONT AIRBAG

(P.107)INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS

MOONROOF SWITCH(P.55)

GAUGES (P.63)

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MANUALTRANSMISSION

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

(P.214)(P.219)

(P.282)

(P.284)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK(P.212)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P.264)

TRUNK RELEASELEVERFUEL FILL DOOR RELEASELEVER

(P.90)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS(P.111)

HOMELINK BUTTONS

(P.9, 23)

(P.261)

(P.9, 23)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS(P.120)CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM(P.125)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P.133)

U.S. EX-L V6 model without navigation system is shown.

(P.226)

０７／０６／１５　１１：０９：０３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０００８　

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.If equippedTo use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

3 :

1 :2 :


4

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS (P.72)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS(P.69, 72)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS(P.75)

NAVIGATION SYSTEMVOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

(P.30)HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS (P.68)

(P.174)

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

(P.73)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER(P.74)

INTERFACE DIAL

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P.100)

(P.211)

(P.294)

(P.231)

(P.223)

BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINK VOICECONTROL BUTTONS

HORN

2

3

3

2

3

1

０７／０６／１５　１１：０９：１１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０００９　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 15.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 18

..Seat Belt System Components . 18......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 21......Airbag System Components . 21

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 23

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 28..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

.............................Airbag Service . 31...Additional Safety Precautions . 31

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 33

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 33

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 34

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 34

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 36

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 36

...Additional Safety Precautions . 36Protecting Infants and

.........................Small Children . 38.......................Protecting Infants . 38

.........Protecting Small Children . 39.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 40....................Installing a Child Seat . 41

...............................With LATCH . 42.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44

..............................With a Tether . 46...........Protecting Larger Children . 47

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 47..................Using a Booster Seat . 48

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 49

...Additional Safety Precautions . 50.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51

...................................Safety Labels . 52

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

０７／０６／１５　１１：０９：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　００１０　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

14

33 50

307

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Don’t Drink and Drive

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

6

０７／０６／１５　１１：０９：２５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００１１　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(7)

(10) (8) (3) (4) (9) (1)(4)

(9)

(11) (8)

(2)

(6)

(7)

(5)(2)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Seat Belt Tensioners

０７／０６／１５　１１：０９：３２　３１ＴＡ０６００　００１２　

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Seat Belts


What You Should Do:

Why Wear Seat Belts

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０７／０６／１５　１１：０９：４３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００１３　

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side or front impact (seepage for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

23

27

28


AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

9

０７／０６／１５　１１：０９：５１　３１ＴＡ０６００　００１４　

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.


What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

10

０７／０６／１５　１１：０９：５６　３１ＴＡ０６００　００１５　

－

CONTINUED

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doorand trunk open monitor systemworks.

Your vehicle has the auto doorlocking/unlocking feature. For moreinformation, see page .Your vehicle has a door and

trunk monitor on theinstrument panel to indicate when aspecific door or the trunk is nottightly closed.

60

33 50

79

80

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Adjust the Front Seats

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

11

０７／０６／１５　１１：１０：０６　３１ＴＡ０６００　００１６　

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust afront seat (power adjustment) andpage for a manual adjustment.

75

92

93

On manual adjustable seats


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０７／０６／１５　１８：０５：０５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００１７　

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust themanual adjustable seat-back, andpage for the power adjustableseat-back.

Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.

93

92

95


Adjust the Head Restraints4.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１０：２３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００１８　

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

14

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１０：３０　３１ＴＡ０６００　００１９　

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

18

CONTINUED

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

RELEASE BUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：１０：３８　３１ＴＡ０６００　００２０　

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.


Advice for Pregnant Women

16

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１０：４５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００２１　

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.


Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Additional Safety PrecautionsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

17

０７／０６／１５　１１：１０：５１　３１ＴＡ０６００　００２２　

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.When no one is sitting in the front

passenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened before

the beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

25 26

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

18

０７／０６／１５　１１：１１：０１　３１ＴＡ０６００　００２３　

CONTINUED

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page ).

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

14

44


Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder BeltD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

19

０７／０６／１５　１１：１１：１１　３１ＴＡ０６００　００２４　

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

If a side airbag or side curtain airbagdeploys during a side impact, thetensioner on that side of the vehiclewill also deploy.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

338

do not deploy

HondaWarranty Information


Seat Belt Maintenance

20

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１１：１９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００２５　

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System ComponentsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

(3)

(5)

(7)

(4)

(7)

(12)

(6)

(8)

(8) (1) (9) (2) (11)(5)

(13)

(14)

(10)(4)

(15)

(16)

(16)

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors Control Unit/

OPDS Sensors Control Unit(13) SRS Indicator(14) Side Curtain Airbags(15) Safing Sensor(16) Side Impact Sensors (Second)

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)

０７／０６／１５　１１：１１：２５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００２６　

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

Your airbag system includes:

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceilingabove the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and the frontpassenger’s seat belt are latchedor unlatched (see page ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

23

27

28

19

27

2529

26

18


22

０７／０６／１５　１１：１１：３５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００２７　

CONTINUED

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).29

30

25


How Your Front Airbags WorkD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

23

０７／０６／１５　１１：１１：４３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００２８　

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.


Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

24

０７／０６／１５　１１：１１：５０　３１ＴＡ０６００　００２９　

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.


Advanced AirbagsDual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

０７／０６／１５　１１：１２：０１　３１ＴＡ０６００　００３０　

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Also, make sure the floor matbehind the front passenger’s seatis properly positioned on the floor(see page ). If it is not, the matmay interfere with the properoperation of the front passenger’sseat and its sensors.

30

338


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

26

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSORS

０７／０６／１５　１１：１２：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００３１　

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the affected side.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag’sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

CONTINUED


Side Airbag Cutoff SystemHow Your Side Airbags WorkD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

０７／０６／１５　１１：１２：１７　３１ＴＡ０６００　００３２　

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

One or both side curtain airbags mayinflate in a moderate to severefrontal collision which causes thefront airbags to deploy.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

29


How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

28

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０７／０６／１５　１１：１２：２４　３１ＴＡ０６００　００３３　

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then goout (see page ). If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

57


How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the SRS Indicator Works

not

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１２：３４　３１ＴＡ０６００　００３４　

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.


How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not mean

30

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. Canada

０７／０６／１５　１１：１２：４３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００３５　

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during a crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

CONTINUED


Additional Safety PrecautionsAirbag ServiceDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

０７／０６／１５　１１：１２：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　００３６　

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.


Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

32

０７／０６／１５　１１：１２：５５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００３７　

－－

－

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

38 4647 50

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１３：０３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００３８　

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

47

30

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks


34

０７／０６／１５　１１：１３：１２　３１ＴＡ０６００　００３９　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

０７／０６／１５　１１：１３：２４　３１ＴＡ０６００　００４０　

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visualcontact, we strongly recommendthat another adult ride with thechild in a back seat. The back seatis far safer for a child than thefront.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


92

15

14

47

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Additional Safety Precautions


Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

36

０７／０６／１５　１１：１３：３４　３１ＴＡ０６００　００４１　

－

If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.4544

86

91


Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

０７／０６／１５　１１：１３：４０　３１ＴＡ０６００　００４２　

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.Do not put a rear-facing child seat in

a forward-facing position.

Child Seat Type

Rear-facing Child Seat PlacementProtecting Infants

38

０７／０６／１５　１１：１３：４８　３１ＴＡ０６００　００４３　

CONTINUED

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

Child Seat Type

Protecting Small ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

39

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１３：５７　３１ＴＡ０６００　００４４　

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

30

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

1.

2.

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

40

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１４：０５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００４５　

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

０７／０６／１５　１１：１４：１４　３１ＴＡ０６００　００４６　

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


42

LOWER ANCHOR Rigid type

BUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：１４：２３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００４７　

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

4.

5.

6.

7.

95


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

Flexible type

TETHERSTRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

０７／０６／１５　１１：１４：３０　３１ＴＡ０６００　００４８　

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


44

０７／０６／１５　１１：１４：３７　３１ＴＡ０６００　００４９　

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

０７／０６／１５　１１：１４：４３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００５０　

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap through the head restraintlegs.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

1.

2.

3.44

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


Using an Anchor

46

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

ANCHOR ANCHOR

TETHER STRAP HOOK TETHER STRAP HOOK

Center PositionOuter Position

０７／０６／１５　１１：１４：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　００５１　

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt FitD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

47

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１４：５９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００５２　

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

4.

5.

3.

40

Using a Booster Seat


48

０７／０６／１５　１１：１５：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　００５３　

CONTINUED

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

14 47


Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

０７／０６／１５　１１：１５：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　００５４　

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.


Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.Do not let a child wear a seat belt

across the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Additional Safety Precautions

50

０７／０６／１５　１１：１５：２３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００５５　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the heating and cooling system/climate control system as shownbelow.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１５：３１　３１ＴＡ０６００　００５６　

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

U.S. models Canadian models

Canadian modelsU.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

U.S. models

Safety Labels

52

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

HOOD

DOORJAMBS

RADIATOR CAP

０７／０６／１５　１１：１５：５５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００５７　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 54............................Instrument Panel . 55

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 56

.............................................Gauges . 63....................Information Display . 64

.....................................Odometer . 64Outside Temperature

...................................Indicator . 65

...................................Trip Meter . 65..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 66

..................Maintenance Minder . 66...................Temperature Gauge . 66

..................................Fuel Gauge . 66Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 67.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 68

.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 69........................................Fog Lights . 72

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 72.................Hazard Warning Button . 73.................Rear Window Defogger . 74

........Steering Wheel Adjustments . 75...............................Keys and Locks . 76

........................Immobilizer System . 77................................Ignition Switch . 78

......................................Door Locks . 79.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 80

..............Childproof Door Locks . 86.......................Remote Transmitter . 86

................................................Trunk . 90........Emergency Trunk Opener . 91

.................................................Seats . 92.Front Seat Power Adjustments . 92

Front Seat Manual............................Adjustments . 93

Driver’s Seat Manual Height..............................Adjustment . 94

..........................Head Restraints . 94.......................Folding Rear Seat . 97

..................................Seat Heaters . 100...........................................Mirrors . 101

............................Power Windows . 103.......................................Moonroof . 107

...............................Parking Brake . 109.........Interior Convenience Items . 110

.....................Beverage Holders . 111........Accessory Power Sockets . 111

.............Console Compartment . 112..................................Glove Box . 113

....................Sunglasses Holder . 113..................................Sun Visors . 114

............................Vanity Mirror . 115..................................Coat Hook . 115

...........................Center Pocket . 115...............................Interior Lights . 116

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

53

０７／０６／１５　１１：１５：５９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００５８　

＊

＊

＊

＊

If equipped:

Control Locations

54

MIRROR CONTROLS

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

TRUNK RELEASELEVER

CLOCK

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

MANUALTRANSMISSION

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS (P.55)

(P.63)

(P.102)

(P.79)

(P.103)

(P.90)

(P.120)

(P.125)

MOONROOF SWITCH (P.107)

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE LEVER

COMPASS

(P.133)

GAUGES

AUDIO SYSTEM

(P.214)(P.219)

(P.282)

(P.284)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK (P.212)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P.264)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS (P.111)

HOMELINK BUTTONS (P.226)

(P.261)

U.S. EX-L V6 model without navigation system is shown.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１６：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　００５９　

＊

＊

＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

55

(P.57)

(P.62)

: If equipped

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

DOOR AND TRUNK OPEN MONITOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

(P.62)

(P.62)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.61)

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.57)

(P.57)

(P.58)

(P.62)

(P.60)

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLMAIN INDICATOR(P.62)

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.61)

(P.56)

(P.60)

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.58)

(P.58)

(P.56, 370)

(P.56, 369)

(P.56, 369)

(P.59)FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR

LOW TIREPRESSUREINDICATOR(P.59)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR (P.59)

０７／０６／１５　１１：１６：１８　３１ＴＡ０６００　００６０　

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. The engine can be severely damaged

if this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

See page .

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

18

369

369

370

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

56

０７／０６／１５　１１：１６：２７　３１ＴＡ０６００　００６１　

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagcutoff system, side curtain airbags,automatic seat belt tensioners,driver’s seat position sensor, or thefront passenger’s weight sensors.For more information, see page .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it remains lit after you fullyrelease the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

1.

2.

29

29

371

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

57

U.S. Canada

CanadaU.S.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１６：３５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００６２　

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

2.

3.

1.

291

293

293

293


VSA Activation IndicatorVehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

58

０７／０６／１５　１１：１６：４４　３１ＴＡ０６００　００６３　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

While the engine is operating in itsmost economical range, thisindicator may come on and stay on.

357

379295

All V6 models

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Fuel Economy Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

０７／０６／１５　１１：１６：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　００６４　

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator will also come onwhen the light switch is in AUTOand the lights turn on automatically.

All the indicators in the monitorcome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

The appropriate indicator comes onin this monitor if the trunk or anydoor is not closed tightly.

332 334

EX-L and EX-L V6


Door and Trunk Open MonitorTurn Signal and Hazard WarningIndicators

Lights On Indicator

60

DRIVER’SDOOR OPENINDICATOR

TRUNKOPENINDICATOR

０７／０６／１５　１１：１６：５９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００６５　

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

If this indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position and release the parkingbrake, it means there is a problemwith the DRL. There may also be aproblem with the high beamheadlights. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5 ) of fuelremaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.

69

71

217

If equipped

High Beam Indicator

Daytime Running LightsIndicator

Security System IndicatorLow Fuel Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

61


０７／０６／１５　１１：１７：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００６６　

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page

for more information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicator(see page ).

72

77

223

223307

322If equipped

Canadian models only

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Maintenance MinderIndicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Cruise Control MainIndicator

Fog Light Indicator


62

０７／０６／１５　１１：１７：２２　３１ＴＡ０６００　００６７　

＊

＊ If equipped:

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

SELECT/RESET KNOBTRIP METER

ODOMETER/CHECK FUEL CAP MESSAGE

TACHOMETER

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

U.S. model is shown. INFORMATION DISPLAY

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

０７／０６／１５　１１：１７：２８　３１ＴＡ０６００　００６８　

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

The information display shows theodometer, trip meter, engine oil life,outside temperature (if equipped),and maintenance item code(s).

To switch the display, press andrelease the select/reset knobrepeatedly. When you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, what you last selected isdisplayed.

Gauges

Odometer

Information Display

64

INFORMATION DISPLAY

TRIP METER A

TRIP METER B

ENGINE OILLIFE

OUTSIDETEMPERATUREINDICATOR

ODOMETER

U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１７：３５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００６９　

± ±

－－－－－－－－

If equippedThis indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theselect/reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

If the outside temperature is

incorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press and hold theselect/reset knob for 10 seconds.The following sequence will appearfor 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5,

4, 3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,3, 3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the select/reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

The trip meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the select/resetknob repeatedly.

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, what you lastselected is displayed.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the select/resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

Gauges

Outside Temperature Indicator Trip MeterInstrum

entsand

Controls

65

０７／０６／１５　１１：１７：４５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００７０　

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom mark to about themiddle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to theupper zone. If it reaches the red(hot) mark, pull safely to the side ofthe road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine cooling system.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

If your fuel fill cap is loose ormissing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message appears on the informationdisplay after you start the engine.For more information, see page .

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

262

307

367

Gauges

Temperature Gauge Fuel GaugeCheck Fuel Cap Message

Maintenance Minder

66

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１７：５３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００７１　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

If equippedOnly on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.1 :2 :3 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

HORN

(P.100)

(P.74)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

(P.69, 72)

(P.75)

(P.72)PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR (P.30)

(P.73)

INTERFACE DIAL

(P.74)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

HEADLIGHT/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICECONTROL BUTTONS

(P.68)

(P.211)

(P.294)

(P.231)

(P.223)BLUETOOTHHANDSFREELINK VOICECONTROL BUTTONS

(P.174)1

3

2

2

3

3

０７／０６／１５　１１：１８：０１　３１ＴＡ０６００　００７２　

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay ( position), thewipers change to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20km/h).

The length of the wipeinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to vehicle’s speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

INT

Windshield Wipers

Windshield Washers

Windshield Wipers and Washers

68

ADJUSTMENT RING

０７／０６／１５　１１：１８：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００７３　

＊

＊

＊

－

－－

＊

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsAUTOHeadlights onHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights offFog lights on

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return to thecenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the lights onindicator comes on as a reminder.

This indicator stays on if you leavethe lights on and turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I) orLOCK (0) position.

To switch from lowbeams to high beams, push the leftlever forward until you hear a click.The blue high beam indicator willcome on (see page ). Pull it backto return to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams stay on as long as you holdthe lever back.

If equipped

Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.

:

61

Turn Signals and Headlights

Turn Signal

High BeamsHeadlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

EX-L V6 model is shown.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１８：１７　３１ＴＡ０６００　００７４　

－Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingfacilities.

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or off for a long time.

The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights andall other exterior lights, when itsenses low ambient light.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when youremove the key and open the driver’sdoor. To turn them on again, eitherturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position or turn the light switchto the position.

To turn on automatic lighting, turnthe light switch to AUTO at any time.The lights will come on automaticallywhen the outside light level becomeslow (at dusk, for example). Thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. The lights and indicatorwill turn off automatically when thesystem senses high ambient light.

The automatic lighting feature iscontrolled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

EX-L and EX-L V6

Headlights

AUTO

70

LIGHT SENSOR

０７／０６／１５　１１：１８：２４　３１ＴＡ０６００　００７５　

This feature turns off the headlights,all other exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights within 15seconds after you remove the keyand close the driver’s door.

The automatic lighting off featureactivates if you leave the headlightswitch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’position or if the lights are turned onby setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’position (if equipped), and youremove the key, then open and closethe driver’s door.

If you turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position with theheadlight switch on, but do not openthe door and get out, the lights turnoff after 10 minutes (3 minutes, ifthe switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’position).

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

With the headlight switch off or inthe position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

Automatic Lighting Off Feature Daytime Running Lights

Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

０７／０６／１５　１１：１８：３１　３１ＴＡ０６００　００７６　

The select/reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness with the ignition switch inthe ON (II) position and the parkinglights on.

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.With the light switch in the AUTOposition (if equipped), you can alsouse the fog lights when theheadlights turn on automatically.They will go off when the headlightsturn off, or the daytime runninglights are on.

U.S. V6 models and Canadian EX-L V6model

Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness

Fog Lights Instrument Panel Brightness

72

SELECT/RESET KNOB

０７／０６／１５　１１：１８：３８　３１ＴＡ０６００　００７７　

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

The level of brightness is shown onthe information display while youadjust it. It goes out about 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . Turning the select/reset knob to the right until you heara beep will cancel the reducedbrightness.

The instrument panel will illuminatewith reduced brightness when youunlock and open the driver’s door.The brightness will increase slightlywhen you insert the key in theignition switch, then go to normalbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver’s door, the illumination turnsoff about 30 seconds after you closethe door.

Hazard Warning Button

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

BRIGHTNESS LEVEL

U.S. model is shown.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１８：４５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００７８　

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. It also shuts off whenyou turn off the ignition switch. Youhave to turn the defogger on againwhen you restart the vehicle.

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .

The defogger will shut itself offwithin about 10 to 30 minutesaccording to the outside temperature(over 32°F, 0°C).

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive. 102

On vehicles with automatic airconditioning system

Except U.S. LX and LX-P

Rear Window Defogger

74

Vehicles with navigation systemAuto A/C type

U.S. LX

Manual A/C typeExcept U.S. LX

０７／０６／１５　１１：１８：５３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００７９　

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustments

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１８：５９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００８０　

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock. You can keep the trunkrelease handle, rear seat trunkaccess, and glove box locked whenyou leave your vehicle and the valetkey at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The valet key does not contain abattery. Do not try to take it apart.

Keys and Locks

76

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTERKEY WITHREMOTETRANSMITTER

VALET KEY(Light Grey)

０７／０６／１５　１１：１９：０６　３１ＴＡ０６００　００８１　

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you lose your key and you cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keychain) is near the ignition switchwhen you insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１９：１４　３１ＴＡ０６００　００８２　

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), START (III)

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in Park.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0)

START (III)

ON (II)

ACCESSORY (I)

78

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

０７／０６／１５　１１：１９：２２　３１ＴＡ０６００　００８３　

The lock tab on any passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks that door.

When the door is unlocked, you cansee the red indicator on the lock tababove the inner door handle.

You can open or close the windowsand the moonroof (if equipped) byusing the key in the driver’s door(see page ).

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in thedriver’s door. To unlock only thedriver’s door, insert the key, turn itclockwise, and release it. Theremaining doors unlock when youturn the key a second time within afew seconds.

To lock all doors, push the front ofthe master door lock switch oneither front door, pull the lock tabrearward on the driver’s door, or usethe key on the outside lock on thedriver’s door.

Pushing the rear of either masterdoor lock switch will unlock all doors.Pushing forward the lock tab on thedriver’s door unlocks only that door.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab rearward and close the door.To lock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pull thelock tab rearward or push the frontof the master switch, then close thedoor.

105

CONTINUED

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

RED INDICATOR

Lock

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

０７／０６／１５　１１：１９：３０　３１ＴＡ０６００　００８４　

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, lockout preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With any door open and thekey in the ignition switch, lockingwith master door lock switch isdisabled. If the driver’s door isclosed, the lock tab on the driver’sdoor is not disabled. Pulling thedriver’s lock tab rearward will lockall doors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pulling the lock tabrearward, the driver’s door lock tabpops out and unlocks the driver’sdoor.

The auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

The doors lock whenever youmove the shift lever out of thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

The doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors toautomatically lock and unlock. Thereare default settings for each of thesefeatures. You can turn off or changethe settings for these features asdescribed on the following pages.

This is the default setting.

When you customize the setting,make sure your vehicle is parkedsafely the engine is off, and apply theparking brake. Make all settingsbefore you start driving.

Lockout Prevention

Door Locks

Auto Door LockingAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

80

０７／０６／１５　１４：５２：４３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００８５　

CONTINUED

Locks all doors when the shift lever ismoved out of the Park (P) position (A/Tvehicles only).

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door until you hear a click(after about 5 seconds).

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and make sure toclose the driver’s door.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Door Locks

To program the Park Lock mode:To turn off the Auto Door Lockmodes:

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

０７／０６／１５　１１：１９：４８　３１ＴＡ０６００　００８６　

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).


Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.

move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).



push and hold thebrake pedal, and move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

3.

4.

Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speedreaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).

On A/T vehicles,

On A/T vehicles,

Door Locks

To program the Drive Lock mode:

82

０７／０６／１５　１１：１９：５７　３１ＴＡ０６００　００８７　

CONTINUED

The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.

The auto door unlocking featurehas five possible settings:


Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click,and after about 5 seconds, you willhear another click.


The driver’s door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

All doors unlock when you movethe shift lever to the Park (P)position (A/T vehicles).

the driver’s doorunlocks when you move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

This is the default setting on M/Tvehicles.

All doors unlock whenever youturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

This is the default setting.

1.

2.

3.

4.On A/T vehicles,

Door Locks

Auto Door Unlocking To turn off the Auto Door Unlockmodes:

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

０７／０６／１５　１１：２０：０８　３１ＴＡ０６００　００８８　

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorswhen the ignition switch is moved out ofthe ON (II) position.

driver’s door unlockfeature,

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorswhen the shift lever is moved into thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles only).

all doors unlock feature.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.


Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate




1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Door Locks

To program the Park Unlock mode: To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

84

０７／０６／１５　１１：２０：１９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００８９　

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.

move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

push and hold thebrake pedal, then move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

Even though your vehicle’s battery isremoved or goes dead, the systemkeeps the auto door lock/unlocksetting which you selected.

4.

5.

6.

3.

On A/T vehicles,

all doors unlock feature.

driver’s door unlockfeature,

On A/T vehicles,

Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

０７／０６／１５　１１：２０：２５　３１ＴＡ０６００　００９０　

－

－

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position (lever isdown), the door cannot be openedfrom the inside regardless of theposition of the lock tab. To open thedoor, push the lock tab forward anduse the outside door handle.

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash once. When you pushLOCK twice within 5 seconds, youwill hear a beep to verify that thedoors are locked and the securitysystem (if equipped) has set. Youcannot lock the doors if any door isnot fully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the remaining doors.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you press the button.

The ceiling light and the dooractivated spotlights (if equipped)come on when you press theUNLOCK button if the lights are inthe door activated position. If you donot open any door within 30 seconds,the light(s) will fade out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light(s) will go offimmediately.

If you do not open any door within 30seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock and the security system (ifequipped) sets.

Childproof Door Locks Remote Transmitter

LOCK

UNLOCK

Door Locks, Remote Transmitter

86

Unlock

LEVER

Lock

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

LED

０７／０６／１５　１１：２０：３２　３１ＴＡ０６００　００９１　

－

－

Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 1 second to openthe trunk. You cannot open the trunkif the key is in the ignition switch.

You can also open all power windowsand the moonroof (if equipped) fromoutside the vehicle with the remotetransmitter (see page ).

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

105

Remote Transmitter

PANIC

TRUNK

Remote Transmitter CareInstrum

entsand

Controls

87

０７／０６／１５　１１：２０：３９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００９２　

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

1.

2.

3.

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

88

SCREW

BATTERY

TAB

０７／０６／１５　１１：２０：４６　３１ＴＡ０６００　００９３　

＋

Remove the old battery, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the side facing down.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.

4.

5.




Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

０７／０６／１５　１１：２０：５３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００９４　

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Give the person the valet key.

Lock the trunk release lever withthe master key. Also make surethe trunk pass-through cover islocked (see page ).

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

You can open the trunk in two ways:

Pull up on the trunk release leverto the left of the driver’s seat.

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thelid, and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

1.

2.

51

99

Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

90

Pull

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER MASTER KEY

０７／０６／１５　１１：２１：０１　３１ＴＡ０６００　００９５　

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page .

Even if the trunk release lever islocked with the master key, you canopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the direction pointed by anarrow.

37

Trunk

Emergency Trunk OpenerInstrum

entsand

Controls

91

０７／０６／１５　１１：２１：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　００９６　

－

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

The controls for the poweradjustable front seats are on theoutside edge of each seat bottom.You can adjust the seats with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

The passenger seat has the sameadjustments as the driver’s seat butwithout any height and lumbaradjustments.

The front passenger’s seat adjustsmanually. Raises or lowers the seat.

(Driver’s seat only)

Moves the front of theseat up or down.(Driver’s seat only)

Moves the whole seat upand forward, or downand backward. The frontof the seat also tilts up ordown at the same time.(Driver’s seat only)

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

Except LX11 13

Driver’s seat only on EX, EX-L andall V6 models

EX-L V6

Except EX-L V6

Seats

Front Seat Power Adjustments

92

０７／０６／１５　１１：２１：１９　３１ＴＡ０６００　００９７　

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

11 13

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

Front Seat Manual Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

０７／０６／１５　１１：２１：２６　３１ＴＡ０６００　００９８　

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

LX model13

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Head Restraints

Seats

94

０７／０６／１５　１１：２１：３３　３１ＴＡ０６００　００９９　

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust arestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

CONTINUED

Seats

Adjusting the Head Restraint Removing the Head Restraint

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

LEGS

CUSHION

RELEASEBUTTON

Front CUSHIONRear Center

SEAT-BACK SEAT-BACKLEGS

RELEASEBUTTON

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

０７／０６／１５　１１：２１：４２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１００　

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupants

against whiplash and injuries to theneck and upper spine.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

Seats

Active Head Restraints

96

０７／０６／１５　１１：２１：５０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１０１　

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back is released from insidethe trunk.

Remove any items from the seatbefore you fold down the seat-back.

Make sure the rear seat armrest isstored.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release under thetrunk panel. Push the seat-backdown from inside the trunk, or pullthe seat-back down from inside thevehicle.

CONTINUED

Folding Rear Seat

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

Pull

GUIDE

RELEASE

０７／０６／１５　１１：２１：５８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１０２　

Make sure that the folded seat-backdoes not press against the frontpassenger’s seat, as this could causethe weight sensors to workimproperly.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back, and the center shoulder belt isre-positioned in the guide wheneverthe seat-back is in its upright position.Be sure there are no twists in anyshoulder belt.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to one of its three positions.

If the rear head restraints get caughton the front seat backs and youcannot fold down the rear seat-backfully, you can remove the headrestraints (see page ).Make sure the removed headrestraints are securely stored.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

51

273

95

Seats


Carrying Cargo

Armrest

98

Front

０７／０６／１５　１１：２２：０６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１０３　

The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seat. Pivot it downto use it.

A beverage holder is located in thearmrest.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

The trunk pass-through cover can beopened from inside the vehicle; itfolds down onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pulling on the cover.To close the cover, swing it up andpush firmly on the top. Make sure itlatches properly.

51

Seats

Trunk Pass-through Cover


Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

KEY CYLINDER

LID

Rear KNOB

０７／０６／１５　１１：２２：１４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１０４　

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag cutoff system,there is no heater in the passenger’sseat-back. The ignition switch mustbe in the ON (II) position to use theheaters.

Push the right side of the switch, HI,to rapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe left side of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

In the LO setting, the heater runs

continuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

EX-L and EX-L V6

Seat Heaters

100

Driver’sSeat

Passenger’sSeat

HEATERS

０７／０６／１５　１１：２２：２１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１０５　

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this feature.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

LX, LX-P, EX and EX V6

EX-L and EX-L V6

Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

AUTO BUTTON

INDICATOR

SENSOR

TAB

There is also a sensor on the back ofthe mirror. Items hung on the mirrormay block this sensor and af f ect itsperf ormance.

０７／０６／１５　１１：２２：２８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１０６　

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

1.

3.

2.

4.

All Canadian modelsU.S. EX, EX-L, EX V6 and EX-L V6

Mirrors

Power Mirror HeatersAdjusting the Power Mirrors

102

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON

EX-L V6 without navigation system isshown.

０７／０６／１５　１１：２２：３５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１０７　

－

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

To open either frontwindow fully (driver’s window onlyon LX), push the window switchfirmly down to the second detent,then release it. The windowautomatically goes down all the way.To stop the window from going allthe way down, pull back on thewindow switch briefly.

To close either front window fully(driver’s window only on LX), pullback the window switch firmly to thesecond detent, then release it. Thewindow automatically goes all theway up. To stop the window fromgoing all the way up, push down onthe window switch briefly.

CONTINUED

AUTO

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

MAIN SWITCH

DRIVER’SWINDOWSWITCH

FRONTPASSENGER’SWINDOW SWITCH

INDICATOR

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０７／０６／１５　１１：２２：４２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１０８　

－

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If either frontwindow (driver’s window only onLX) senses any obstacle while it isclosing automatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

When you push the main switch in,the indicator comes on and thepassengers’ windows cannot beraised or lowered. Use the mainswitch when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally. To cancelthis feature, push on the switchagain. The switch will pop out andthe indicator will go off.

The windows and the main switchfeature will operate for up to 10minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

The indicators inside the windowswitches come on when the lightcontrol switch is in either or

position with the ignitionswitch in the ON (II) position(driver’s window switch only on LX).

Only on the driver’s window,the auto reverse function is disabledwhen you continuously pull up theswitch.

Power Windows

AUTO REVERSE

104

NOTE:

０７／０６／１５　１４：５２：４９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１０９　

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Theremaining doors unlock, and allfour windows and the moonroofstart to open. To stop the windowsand moonroof, release the button.

You can open and close the windowsand the moonroof (if equipped) withthe key in the driver’s door lock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To open:Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

You can open all of the windows andthe moonroof (if equipped) from theoutside with the remote transmitter.

To open the windows andmoonroof further, press thebutton again (within 10 seconds ofstep 1) and hold it. If the windowsand the moonroof stop before thedesired position, repeat steps 1and 2.

You cannot close the windows or themoonroof with the remotetransmitter.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Power Windows

Opening the Windows andMoonroof with the RemoteTransmitter

Opening/Closing the Windowsand Moonroof with the Key

Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

Open

Close

UNLOCKBUTTON

０７／０６／２８　１０：０８：０４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１１０　

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows and themoonroof start to open. To stopthe windows and the moonroof,release the key.

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows and the moonroof start toclose. To stop the windows andthe moonroof, release the key.

To close the windows and themoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 10 secondsof step 2).

To open the windows and themoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 10 secondsof step 2).

NOTE: If the windows and themoonroof stop before the desiredposition, repeat steps 2 and 3.

NOTE: If the windows and themoonroof stop before the desiredposition, repeat steps 2 and 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

Power Windows

106

０７／０６／１５　１１：２３：０４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１１１　

－ To open the moonrooffully, pull back the moonroof switchfirmly, then release it. The moonroofautomatically opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from opening,push the switch briefly.

To close the moonroof fully, firmlypush the moonroof switch forward,then release it. The moonroofautomatically closes all the way. Tostop the moonroof from closing,push the switch briefly.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, lightly pull the switch backor push it forward and hold it. Themoonroof will stop when you releasethe switch.

To tilt up the moonroof, push on thecenter of the moonroof switch. Tostop the moonroof from tilting upfully, push the switch briefly.

To open the moonroof, pull back onthe switch and hold it. Release theswitch when the moonroof reachesthe desired position. To close themoonroof, push the switch forwardand hold it. Release the switch tostop the operation.

The moonroof can be tilted up in theback for ventilation, or it can be slidback into the roof. Use the switch onthe front ceiling to operate themoonroof. You must turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position to operate the moonroof.

If equipped

CONTINUED

AUTO

Moonroof

Instruments

andC

ontrols

107

MOONROOF SWITCH

Open

Close

Tilt

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

０７／０６／１５　１１：２３：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１１２　

You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch.Opening either front door cancelsthis function.

You can use the remote transmitteror the key to operate the moonrooffrom the outside. Refer to page

for details.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

105

Moonroof

Operating the Moonroof with theRemote Transmitter or the Key

Auto Reverse

108

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

０７／０６／１５　１１：２３：１９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１１３　

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).57

Parking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

109

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

０７／０６／１５　１１：２３：２３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１１４　

Interior Convenience Items

110

GLOVE BOX

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

VANITY MIRROR SUN VISOR

TRUNK

CENTER POCKETS

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

COAT HOOK

BEVERAGE HOLDER inREAR SEAT ARMREST

BEVERAGE HOLDER

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

DOOR POCKET

０７／０６／１５　１１：２３：２８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１１５　

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

Your vehicle has two accessorypower sockets; one is at the front ofthe center console and the other is inthe console compartment.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Open the front beverage holder bypulling up on the lid.

CONTINUED


Beverage Holders Accessory Power SocketsInstrum

entsand

Controls

111

FRONT REAR FRONT

０７／０６／１５　１１：２３：３６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１１６　

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever and lift thearmrest.

The console compartment isequipped with a detachable tray.

To remove this tray, slide it forward,then pull it up.

Each socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

Make sure to put the socket coverback in place to prevent any smallforeign objects getting into thesocket.

Except LX

Console Compartment


112

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

LEVER DETACHABLE TRAY

０７／０６／１５　１１：２３：４５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１１７　

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushthen release the indent. It willunlatch and swing down. To close it,push it until it latches. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.

CONTINUED

Sunglasses HolderGlove Box


Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

GLOVE BOX

To lock

Push

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０７／０６／１５　１１：２３：５３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１１８　

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.In this position, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.Do not use the extended sun visorover the inside mirror.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.


Sun Visors

114

SUN VISOR

Slide

０７／０６／１５　１１：２４：００　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１１９　

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The vanity mirror lights come onwhen you pull up the cover.

To use a coat hook, slide it outslightly, then pull it down.

Make sure the coat hook is folded upwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

Pull up the lid to open each pocket.


Vanity Mirror Coat Hook Center PocketInstrum

entsand

Controls

115

０７／０６／１５　１１：２４：０８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１２０　

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch; ON, Door Activated, andOFF. In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on whenyou:

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door, thelight stays on, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

Turn on a spotlight by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

If you leave any door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after about 15minutes.

Unlock the driver’s door with thekey or remote transmitter.

Open any door.

Ceiling Light Spotlights

Interior Lights

116

DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

LX, LX-P

０７／０６／１５　１１：２４：１７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１２１　

The spotlights have a two-positionswitch. In the DOOR position, thelights come on when you open anydoor. The lights fade out in about 30seconds after the doors are closedtightly. In the OFF position, thelights do not come on.

The spotlights (with the switch inthe DOOR position) also come onwhen you unlock the door with thekey or the remote transmitter, andwhen you remove the key from theignition switch.

The courtesy light in each front doorcomes on when the door is opened,and goes out when the door is closed.

Your vehicle also has a courtesy lightin the ignition switch. This lightcomes on when you open the driver’sdoor. It fades out in about 30seconds after the door is closed.

CONTINUED

Except LX and LX-P

Interior Lights

Courtesy LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

117

DOOR ACTIVATED SPOTLIGHT

OFF POSITION

０７／０６／１５　１１：２４：２３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１２２　

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the select/resetknob on the instrument panel, withthe ignition switch in the ON (II)position.

Except LX and LX-P

Interior Lights

118

０７／０６／１５　１１：２４：２６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１２３　

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 120...............Climate Control System . 125

..........Dual Temperature Control . 130..............Climate Control Sensors . 132

................................Audio System . 133

..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 134................................Playing a Disc . 141

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 148

................................Audio System . 149..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 150

.Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 157.................................Playing Discs . 163

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 173

................................Audio System . 174..........Playing the FM/AM Radio . 175

.Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 187.................................Playing Discs . 194

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 205..................Protecting Your Discs . 206

............FM/AM Radio Reception . 209................Remote Audio Controls . 211

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 212

.................Radio Theft Protection . 213..........................Setting the Clock . 214

............................Security System . 217.........................................Compass . 219

...............................Cruise Control . 223HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 226.......Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 231

LX and LX-P models

EX, EX-L and V6 models withoutnavigation system

Models with navigation system

Except LX and LX-P

Except LX and LX-P

Features

Features

119

０７／０６／１５　１１：２４：３１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１２４　

＊

＊

: If equipped

Vents, Heating, and A/CLX, LX-P, EX, and EX V6

120

MODE CONTROLBUTTONS

FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATION BUTTON TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

MAX A/C BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING (A/C)BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRRORS BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

０７／０６／１５　１１：２４：３５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１２５　

Turn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches torecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard. Pressing the , A/C,or any of the mode buttons cancelsMAX A/C.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

/

74

CONTINUED

Except U.S. LX and LX-P

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Fan Control

Temperature Control

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

MAX A/C Button

Recirculation Button Rear Window DefoggerButton

Mode Control

Features

121

０７／０６／１５　１１：２４：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１２６　

Air flows from the floorvents.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode. If you switch the mode from

or to , the systemkeeps the A/C on. The A/Cindicator will not come on if it wasoff to start with.

To turn off the A/C, press the A/Cbutton to illuminate the indicator,then press it again to turn off theA/C.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you switch to ormode from , the A/C

turns off. But if it was on to startwith, the A/C stays on.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.You cannot turn the A/C off in thismode.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode. If you switch the modefrom or , the systemalso automatically turns on theA/C. This helps prevent thewindows from fogging upunintendedly. The A/C indicatorwill not come on if it was off tostart with (see the first column onthis page).Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.Airflow is divided between

the floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

1.

2.3.4.

1.

2.3.


Ventilation

Using the Heater

122

０７／０６／１５　１１：２５：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１２７　

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theair conditioning, and setting the fanto maximum speed in fresh air mode.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select MAX A/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects , andswitches to recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

66

If the interior is very warm, Dehumidify the InteriorUsing the A/C


Features

123

０７／０６／１５　１１：２５：１７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１２８　

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

When you switch to , fromor , the A/C stays on.

This helps prevent the windows fromrapidly fogging up when the air issuddenly routed away from thewindshield. If you want to turn theA/C off, press and release the A/Cbutton twice. The indicator in thebutton comes on and then goes off.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator does not comeon if it was off to start with.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas off to start with.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select / to helpclear the rear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

To Defog and Defrost To Turn Everything OffTo Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows


124

０７／０６／１５　１１：２５：２８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１２９　

Climate Control System

With navigation systemWithout navigation system

EX-L and EX-L V6F

eatures

125

AUTO BUTTON AIRCONDITIONINGBUTTON

AUTOINDICATOR

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURE

OFF BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON FAN CONTROL SWITCH

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTERBUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURE

FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE

AIRCONDITIONINGBUTTON

FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE CONTROLSWITCH

FRONT PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE CONTROLSWITCH

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

DUALBUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER/HEATEDMIRRORBUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

AUTOINDICATOR

CENTERDISPLAY

FAN CONTROLBAR

AUTOBUTTON

OFF BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE TEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH

FRONT PASSENGER’SSIDE TEMPERATURE

MODECONTROLBUTTON

MODE CONTROL BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER/HEATEDMIRROR BUTTON

０７／０６／２８　１０：０８：１２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１３０　

The automatic climate controlsystem in your vehicle picks theproper combination of airconditioning, heating, and ventilationto maintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and airflow levels.

The system automatically selectsthe proper mix of conditionedand/or heated air that will, asquickly as possible, raise or lowerthe interior temperature to yourpreference.

The climate control system can alsobe operated by voice control. See theNavi section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

Press the Auto button. Theindicator in the button also comeson as a reminder. You will seeAUTO on the display (in thecenter display on models withnavigation system).

Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control switch.You can set the driver’s sidetemperature and the passenger’sside temperature separately.

The driver’s side temperature andthe passenger’s side temperature canbe set separately. Push up the switchof the appropriate temperaturecontrol to increase the temperatureof airflow. Push down the switch todecrease it. Each set temperature isshown in the display (in the centerdisplay on models with navigationsystem).

1.

2.

On models with navigation systemUsing Automatic Climate ControlVoice Control System

Temperature Control


126

０７／０６／１５　１１：２５：４３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１３１　

When the indicator in the dualbutton is on, the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

When you adjust a fan control, thefan is taken out of AUTO mode.

In AUTO mode, the vehicle’s interiortemperature is independentlyregulated for the driver and frontpassenger according to eachadjusted temperature. The systemalso regulates each temperaturebased on the information of the sunlight sensor and the sun positionwhich is updated automatically bythe navigation’s global positioning

system (GPS). For example, if thedriver’s side of the vehicle is gettingtoo much sun, the system will adjustto a lower temperature.

You can set the temperatures for thedriver’s side and the passenger’s sideseparately when this button ispressed (indicator is on). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,the temperatures for both sides aresynchronized to the driver’s side settemperature. When defrost mode isselected, dual mode operation iscanceled.

If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

130

On models with navigation system


Dual Button

To Turn Everything OffF

eatures

127

０７／０６／１５　１１：２５：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１３２　

▲

▼

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Push the switch up to increase thefan speed and airflow. Push theswitch down to decrease them.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

Press the side of the bar toincrease the fan speed and airflow.Press the side of the bar todecrease them.

On models without navigation system

On models with navigation system

Recirculation ButtonAir Conditioning (A/C) ButtonSemi-automatic Operation

Fan Control


128

０７／０６／１５　１１：２６：０２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１３３　

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

Use the mode control button toselect the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows, set as follows:

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor and corner vents and thedefroster vents at the base of thewindshield.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

This button directs the main airflowto the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anymode selection you may have made.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease airflow to the windshield byclosing the corner vents on thedashboard. To close the vents, rotatethe wheel under each corner vent.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.Adjust the temperature with thedriver’s side temperature controlso the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.For faster defogging, manually setthe fan speed to high.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

When the indicator in the button ison, the front passenger’stemperature cannot be set separatelyfrom the driver’s.

1.

2.

3.

4.

74

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

Windshield Defroster Button


Features

129

０７／０６／１５　１１：２６：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１３４　

Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol switches, one for the driver,and one for the front passenger.

The driver’s side and the passenger’sside temperature can be controlledindependently by adjusting theseswitches when the green indicator inthe DUAL button is on.

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the display(in the center display on models withnavigation system). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature by pushing thedriver’s side temperature controlswitch up or down.

EX-L and EX-L V6

Dual Temperature Control

Temperature Control

130

DUAL BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

Without navigation system

With navigation system

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH


PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL SWITCH


０７／０６／２８　１０：０８：１９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１３５　

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then push the switch up or down onthe driver’s side. To set thepassenger’s side to a different valuethan the driver’s, push the switch upor down on the passenger’s side. Youcan adjust the passenger’s sidewithout pressing the DUAL buttonfirst.

When you set the temperature to itslower or upper limit, it is displayed as

or .

Dual Temperature Control

Features

131

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

０７／０６／１５　１１：２６：２９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１３６　

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

On models with climate control system

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

Climate Control Sensors

132

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

０７／０６／１５　１１：２６：３４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１３７　

An audio system is standard on allmodels. Read the appropriate pages(as shown below) to use yourvehicle’s audio system.

On models with navigation system,see pages through .

On EX and EX V6 models, and EX-Land EX-L V6 models withoutnavigation system, see pages

through .

On LX model (including LX-P), seepages through .

149 173

174 205

148134

Audio System

Features

133

With navigation system

EX and EX V6 models

EX-L and EX-L V6 models withoutnavigation system

LX and LX-P models

０７／０６／２８　１０：０８：３２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１３８　

Playing the FM/AM Radio (LX model)

134

SCAN BUTTON

FOLDER BAR POWER/VOLUME KNOB

FM BUTTON

AM BUTTON TUNE (SOUND) KNOB

SKIP BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONS

TITLE BUTTON

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)BUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：２６：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１３９　

－

－

－The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM orFM button. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station is broad-casting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noisereduction turns on automatically.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, skip, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

On the FM band, you can also usethe features provided by the radiodata system (RDS). For moreinformation on the RDS, see page

.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob to the right to tune toa higher frequency, and turn it to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.

The skip function searchesup and down from the currentfrequency to find a station with astrong signal. To activate it, presseither of the SKIP buttons ( or

), then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

137

CONTINUED

To Select a StationTo Play the FM/AM Radio

TUNE

SKIP

SCAN


Features

135

０７／０６／１５　１１：２７：０１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１４０　

－－

－

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Pick a preset button (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDSfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Press the A. SEL button. You will seeA. SEL flashing in the display, andthe system goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.

1.

2.

3.

4.

209

To turn off auto select

AUTO SELECTPreset


136

０７／０６／１５　１１：２７：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１４１　

On the FM band, you can select afavorite station and display theprogram service name according tothe information provided by theradio data system (RDS).

The program service name displayfunction shows the name of thestation you are listening to. With theaudio system on and the FM bandselected, you can turn this functionon or off.

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the displaycontinues to show the frequencywith the PS name display function on.

To switch the function between onand off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee ‘‘PS ON’’ message on the display.If the station you are listening to isan RDS station, the displayedfrequency switches to the stationname.

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thedisplay shows ‘‘PS OFF.’’

CONTINUED


Radio Data System (RDS)

Program Service (PS) Name Display Features

137

０７／０６／１５　１１：２７：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１４２　

▲ ▼

On the FM band selected, you canselect the program categoryprovided by the RDS. Press eitherside of the FOLDER bar ( or )to display and select an RDScategory. The principal RDScategories are shown as follows;

ALL: All RDS category stationsROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock music

SOFT: Adult hits and soft musicTOP 40: Top 40 of hitsOLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesR & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and blues

Press either side of the FOLDER barto select an RDS category. Thedisplay shows the selected RDScategory name for about 10 seconds.You can use the search or scanfunction to find radio stations on theselected RDS category. If you donothing while the RDS categoryname is displayed, the selectedcategory is cancelled.

TRAFFIC: Traffic information

INFO: News, information, sport, talk,foreign language, personality, public,college, and weather

JAZZ: JazzCLASSIC: Classical music

RELIGION: Religion music andreligion talk

This function searches up and downa frequency for the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry theselected RDS category information.This can help you to find a station inyour favorite category. To activate it,press and release either of the SKIPbuttons ( or ). You will seethe selected RDS category nameblinking while searching it. Whenthe system finds a station, theselected RDS category name will bedisplayed again for about 5 seconds.

If the system does not find a station,‘‘NOTHING’’ will be blinking forabout 5 seconds, then the systemgoes back to the last selected station.

COUNTRY: Country music


Radio Data System (RDS) Category RDS Program Search

138

RDS CATEGORY

０７／０６／１５　１１：２７：２９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１４３　

The scan function samples allstations with strong signals on theselected RDS category. To activate it,press and release the SCAN button.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal in the selectedRDS category. You will also see theselected RDS category nameblinking while searching it. When itfinds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.


You can use the RDS programsearch or scan function even if thePS name display function is off. Inthis case, the display shows afrequency in place of a PS name.


RDS Program SCANF

eatures

139

０７／０６／１５　１１：２７：３４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１４４　

－

－

－

－

－

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob

repeatedly to display the BASS,TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, andSVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation) settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the TUNE knob toadjust the setting to your liking.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to

adjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.

When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode. 72

Except SVC adjustment

Adjusting the Sound SVC

Audio System Lighting

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCESpeed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)


140

０７／０６／１５　１１：２７：４５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１４５　

Playing a Disc (LX model)

Features

141

DISC EJECT BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONS

CD BUTTON

FOLDER BAR

RPT/RDM (REPEAT/RANDOM)BAR

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT)BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE (SOUND) KNOB

LOAD INDICATOR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：２７：４９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１４６　

－

－

－

－To load or play a disc, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)Bit rate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. You can select up to 99folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.

Video CDs and DVD discs do notwork in this unit.

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay. NOTE:

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays UNSUPPORTED, and thenskips to the next file.

To Play a Disc


142

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０７／０６／１５　１１：２７：５８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１４７　

－

－

－

－

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the current track isshown in the display. When playing adisc in MP3 or WMA, the numbersof the current folder and file areshown. The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

Bit rate:32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192kbps

Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-session

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and theartist, album, and track tag.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display shows you thetext data on a disc, if the disc wasrecorded with text data.

206

CONTINUED


Text Data Display FunctionTo Load a DiscF

eatures

143

０７／０６／１５　１１：２８：０８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１４８　

－

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

You can use the SKIP buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks (files in MP3/WMA mode).

Each time you press andrelease the SKIP button, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease the to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or SKIPbutton.

The display shows up to about 14characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.). If thetext data has more than 14characters, you will see the first 14characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 14characters are shown.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files


SKIP

144

０７／０６／１５　１１：２８：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１４９　

－

▲▼

－

－－In MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode

CONTINUED

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the FOLDER bar to move tothe beginning of the next folder.Press the side of the bar to skip tothe next folder, and the side ofthe bar to skip to the beginning ofthe previous folder.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT side ofthe RPT/RDM bar. You will see RPTin the display. Press and hold theRPT side for 2 seconds to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files onthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press the RPT side of theRPT/RDM bar twice. You will hear abeep and see F-RPT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press the RPT side ofthe bar again to turn it off. Pressingthe RDM side of the bar, or selectinga different folder with the FOLDERbar also turns off the repeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT side of the bar, the modechanges from file repeat to folderrepeat, then to normal playing.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, press andrelease the RDM side of the RPT/RDM bar. In MP3 or WMA mode,press the RDM side of the barrepeatedly to select RDM (within adisc random play). You will see RDMin the display. Press the RDM side ofthe bar for 2 seconds to return tonormal play.


FOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER-REPEATRANDOM (Random within adisc)

Features

145

０７／０６／１５　１１：２８：２２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１５０　

－－－

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the remainingfolders for 10 seconds each. Afterplaying the first file of the last folder,the system plays normally.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press and hold theSCAN button for about 2 seconds toget out of scan mode and play thelast track/file sampled.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttonsalso turns off the scan feature.

Thisfeature, when activated, samples thefirst file of each folder on the disc.To activate folder scan, press theSCAN button twice. You will seeF-SCAN in the display.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons,selecting a different folder with theFOLDER bar, or pressing the SCANbutton, also turns off the folder scan.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan to folder scan, then tonormal playing.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles on the selected folder in randomorder. To activate folder random,press the RDM side of the RPT/RDM bar repeatedly. You will seeF-RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random by pressingand holding the RDM side of the baragain, or by selecting a differentfolder with the FOLDER bar.

Each time you press and release theRDM side of the bar, the modechanges from folder random play torandom play (within a disc randomplay), then to normal playing.


SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)FOLDER-RANDOM

146

０７／０６／１５　１１：２８：３０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１５１　

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.


.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM or FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the disc player.

206

Protecting Discs

To Stop Playing a Disc


Features

147

０７／０６／１５　１１：２８：３７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１５２　

The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.

CauseThe chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For the additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

ErrorMessage

Solution

207

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Current track will skipped. The next supportedtrack or file plays automatically.Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 207 ). Insert the disc again. If thecode does not disappear, or the disc cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Player Error Messages (LX model)

148

UNSUPPORTED

BAD DISCCHECK MANUAL

PUSH EJECT

BAD DISCCHECK MANUAL

０７／０６／１５　１１：２８：４４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１５３　

Most audio system functions can becontrolled by standard buttons, bars,and knobs. In addition this, you canaccess some functions by using theselector knob on the audio system.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto scroll through lists, to makeselections or adjustments to a list ormenu item on the display. When youmake a selection, push the center ofthe selector (ENTER) to go to thatselection.

When the audio system is in XMsatellite radio mode or playing discs,pushing the selector (ENTER) knobswitches the display between thenormal display and the extendeddisplay. The extended display hasthree segments to display thedetailed information.

To select any setting such as a clock,sound adjusting, or the compass (ifequipped), press the MENU buttonwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.You can select the item by turningthe selector knob. To go back to theprevious display, press the RETURNbutton.

Pressing the MENU button againwill also cancel the menu displaymode.

Audio System (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)

Selector Knob Menu DisplayF

eatures

149

SELECTORKNOB

MENUBUTTON

RETURNBUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：２８：５１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１５４　

Playing the FM/AM Radio (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)

Without XM satellite radio With XM satellite radio

150

SKIP BAR

SELECTORKNOB

PRESETBUTTONS

RETURN BUTTON

A.SEL (AUTOSELECT) BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SKIP BAR

SELECTORKNOB

PRESETBUTTONS

RETURN BUTTON

CATEGORYBAR A.SEL (AUTO

SELECT) BUTTON

TITLEBUTTON

TITLEBUTTON

MENU BUTTON

FMBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

FOLDER BAR

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

AMBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

AMBUTTON

FMBUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：２８：５９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１５５　

－

－

－

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM orFM button. On the FM band, ST willbe displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.


The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM orFM button. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, skip, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

The skip function searchesup and down from the currentfrequency to find a station with astrong signal. To activate it, pressand hold the or side of theSKIP bar until you hear a beep, thenrelease it.

On the FM band, you can also usethe features provided by the radiodata system (RDS). For moreinformation on the RDS, see page

.

Use the selector knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

Each time you press and releaseeither side of the SKIP bar, the radiofrequency changes in smallincrements.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.


153

CONTINUED

To Select a StationTo Play the Radio

SKIP

TUNE

SCAN


Features

151

０７／０６／１５　１１：２９：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１５６　

－－Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.


If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forthat preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDSfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A-SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.


.

1.

2.

3.

4.

209

To turn off auto selectPreset AUTO SELECT


152

０７／０６／１５　１１：２９：１８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１５７　


The program service name displayfunction shows the name of thestation you are listening to. With theaudio system on and the FM bandselected, you can turn this functionon or off. To switch the function between on

and off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee ‘‘PS ON’’ message on the display.If the station you are listening to isan RDS station, the displayedfrequency switches to the stationname.

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the displaycontinues to show the frequencywith the PS name display function on.

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thedisplay shows ‘‘PS OFF.’’

CONTINUED




153

PROGRAM SERVICENAME DISPLAY ON

０７／０６／１５　１１：２９：２５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１５８　

▲ ▼

On the FM band selected, you canselect the program categoryprovided by the RDS. Press eitherside ( or ) of the CATEGORYbar (FOLDER bar on models withoutXM radio) to display and select anRDS category. The principal RDScategories are shown as follows;

ALL: All RDS category stationsROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock music

SOFT: Adult hits and soft musicTOP 40: Top 40 of hitsOLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesR & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and bluesRELIGION: Religion music andreligion talkCLASSIC: Classical musicJAZZ: JazzINFO: News, information, sport, talk,foreign language, personality, public,college, and weatherTRAFFIC: Traffic information

Press either side of the CATEGORYbar (FOLDER bar on models withoutXM radio) to select an RDS category.The display shows the selected RDScategory name for about 10 seconds.You can use the search or scanfunction to find radio stations on theselected RDS category. If you donothing while the RDS categoryname is displayed, the selectedcategory is cancelled.

COUNTRY: Country musicThis function searches up and downa frequency for the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry theselected RDS category information.This can help you to find a station inyour favorite category. To activate it,press and release either side( or ) of the SKIP bar. Youwill see the selected RDS categoryname blinking while searching it.When the system finds a station, theselected RDS category name will bedisplayed again for about 5 seconds.



Radio Data System (RDS) Category RDS Program Search

154

RDS CATEGORY

０７／０６／１５　１１：２９：３９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１５９　

＊

＊

The scan function samples allstations with strong signals on theselected RDS category. To activate it,press and release the SCAN button.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal in the selectedRDS category. You will also see theselected RDS category nameblinking while searching it. When itfinds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.




Press the MENU button to displaythe sound settings. Turn the selectorknob to select an appropriate setting:bass, treble, fader, balance, SUBW(subwoofer) and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation).Press the selector (ENTER) knob toenter the setting, then turn theselector knob to adjust the setting.

If equipped:CONTINUED


RDS Program SCAN Adjusting the SoundF

eatures

155

Selector knob adjustabledirection is shown.

FADER is selectable.

０７／０６／１５　１１：２９：４８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１６０　

－

－

－

－

－

－

Adjusts the bass.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the selector knob toadjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the strength ofsound from the subwoofer speaker.

Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the selector knob toadjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.

To return to the normal playing,push the RETURN or MENU buttonafter you stop adjusting a mode.


72

If equipped


BASS

Audio System Lighting

BALANCE

FADER

TREBLE

SUBW

SVC

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)

156

SUBWOOFER is selectable.

０７／０６／２８　１０：０８：４４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１６１　

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (EX-L and EXL V6 models without navigation system)

Features

157

CATEGORY BAR SKIP BAR

XM RADIO BUTTON

MENU BUTTONRETURN BUTTON SELECTOR KNOB

SCAN BUTTONPOWER/VOLUMEKNOB

TITLE BUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：３０：０６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１６２　

－

To listen to XM satellite radio, turnthe ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,and press the button. Thelast channel you listened to will showin the display. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the TITLE buttonuntil the mode changes.

In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, and Canada, exceptHawaii and Alaska. XM is aregistered trade mark of XMSatellite Radio, Inc.

XM satellite radio receives signalsfrom two satellites to produce clear,high-quality digital reception. Itoffers many channels in severalcategories. Along with a largeselection of different types of music,XM satellite radio allows you to viewchannel and category selections inthe display.

Each time you press and release theTITLE button, the display changes inthe following sequence: name, title,and category.

You can also change the mode fromthe menu items. Press the MENUbutton to display the menu items,then turn the selector knob to selectMODE/CATEGORY and press theselector knob (ENTER). Each timeyou press and release the selectorknob (ENTER), the display changesbetween CHANNEL andCATEGORY. To enter the setting,press the TITLE button.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.


Operating the Satellite Radio

MODE

158

０７／０６／１５　１１：３０：１４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１６３　

－

▼ ▲ －－

CONTINUED

The SCAN function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

Presseither side of the CATEGORY bar toselect another category.

You can also select a channel orcategory from the list by using theselector knob. Push the selectorknob (ENTER) to switch the displayto the list displayed with threesegments, then turn the knob toselect a channel or category. Pressthe selector knob (ENTER) to setyour selection.

Turn the selector knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.


SCAN

CATEGORY ( or )TUNEF

eatures

159

Channel list is shown.

０７／０６／１５　１１：３０：２１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１６４　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:Press the button. EitherXM1 or XM2 will show in thedisplay.

Use the selector knob, or theCATEGORY bar or SCAN buttonto tune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe button until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM button again. Theother XM band will show. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.


Preset

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

160

０７／０６／１５　１１：３０：３２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１６５　

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.Large items carried on a roof rack.

CONTINUED


Features

161

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０７／０６／１５　１１：３０：４１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１６６　

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated,‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CHANNEL’’ willappear in the display, and you’ll beable to listen to XM Radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position, press the

button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact

, or call 1-877-438-9677. You will need to give themyour radio I.D. number and yourcredit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, press the

button, then turn theselector knob until ‘‘CH 000’’ appearsin the display. Your I.D. will appearin the display.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca


Receiving Satellite Radio Service

162

０７／０６／２８　１０：０８：５１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１６７　

Playing Discs (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)

Features

Without XM satellite radio With XM satellite radio

163

SCANBUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

FOLDER BAR

SELECTORKNOB

PRESETBUTTONS

RETURN BUTTON

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

DISC LOADBUTTON

DISC SLOT

CD BUTTON

DISCEJECTBUTTON SCAN

BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

SELECTORKNOB

PRESETBUTTONS

RETURN BUTTON

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

DISC LOADBUTTON

DISCEJECTBUTTON

DISC SLOT CD/AUX BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

０７／０６／１５　１１：３０：５８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１６８　

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. The disc, folder and tracknumbers are displayed. You canselect up to 255 folders or tracks.

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

Video CDs and DVD discs do notwork in this unit.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz(MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbpsCompatible with variable bit rate andmulti-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:

Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Sampling frequency:22.05/32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsYou operate the disc changer with

the same controls used for the radio.To select the disc changer, press theCD/AUX or CD button. You will see‘‘CD’’ in the display. The disc andtrack numbers, and the elapsed timeare shown in the display. You canalso select the displayed informationwith the TITLE button (see page

). The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.166

To Play a Disc


164


０７／０６／１５　１１：３１：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１６９　

Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changerholds up to six discs.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this unit.

When the disc load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thedisplay again, insert the next discin the slot. Do not try to insert adisc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. Youcould damage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system beginsplaying the last disc loaded.

You can also load a disc into anempty position while a disc is playingby pressing the appropriate presetbutton. The system stops playing thecurrent disc and starts the loadingsequence. It then plays the disc justloaded.

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ inthe display. To load only one disc,press and release the LOADbutton.

The disc number for an emptyposition begins blinking.

Insert the disc into the disc slotwhen the green disc load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while thedisc load indicator turns red andblinks as the disc is loaded.

NOTE:If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays UNSUPPORTED, and thenskips to the next file.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Loading Discs


Features

165

０７／０６／１５　１１：３１：１７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１７０　

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

The display shows up to about 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and theartist, album, and track tag.

If the text data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 16characters and the indicator inthe display. Press and hold theTITLE button until the next 16characters are shown. You can seeup to about 32 characters of the textdata.

Each time you press the TITLEbutton, the display shows you thetext data on a disc, if the disc wasrecorded with text data.

If you press and hold the TITLEbutton again, the display shows thefirst 16 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in the display.When the disc has no text data, youwill see ‘‘NO INFO’’ on the display.

When you press and release theTITLE button while a disc withouttext data is playing, you will see ‘‘NOINFO’’ on the display.

When you turn on the audio systemnext time, the system keeps yourselection with the TITLE button.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

Text Data Display Function


166

０７／０６／１５　１１：３１：２８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１７１　

－Use the SKIP bar while a disc isplaying to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3 or WMAmode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use theFOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar onmodels with XM satellite radio) toselect folders in the disc and useeither side of the skip bar to changefiles.

To select a different disc, use theappropriate preset buttons (1through 6). If you select an emptyposition, the system will go into theloading sequence (see page ).

Each time you press andrelease the side of the skip bar,the player skips forward to thebeginning of the next track (file inMP3 or WMA mode). Press andrelease the side of the bar toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track or file,press and hold either side ( or

) of the skip bar.In MP3 or WMA mode, you can alsoselect a folder or track/file from thelist by using the selector knob. Pushthe selector knob (ENTER) toswitch the display to the listdisplayed with three segments, thenturn the knob to select a folder.Press the selector knob (ENTER) tochange the display to the track/filelist, then turn the same knob toselect a track/file. Press the selectorknob (ENTER) to set your selection.

165

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks/Files


SKIPF

eatures

167

Folder Selection

Press ENTERTrack Selection

０７／０６／１５　１１：３１：３７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１７２　

－

▲ ▼

▲▼

You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theMENU button and the selector knob.Push the MENU button to displaythe menu items, then turn theselector knob to select ‘‘PLAYMODE.’’ Press the selector knob(ENTER) to set the selection.

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside ( or ) of the FOLDER bar(CATEGORY bar on models withXM satellite radio) to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side to skip to the next folder,and press the side to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

Turn the selector knob to select anappropriate repeat, random or scanmode, then press the selector knob(ENTER) to set your selection.

To cancel the selected repeat,random, or scan mode, press theMENU button to show ‘‘PLAYMODE,’’ then press the selectorknob (ENTER). When you see‘‘NORMAL PLAY,’’ press ENTERagain.

In MP3 or WMA mode


To select repeat, random or scanmode:FOLDER SELECTION

168

MENU ITEMS

PLAY MODE ITEMS

０７／０６／１５　１１：３１：４６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１７３　

－－

－

－

－

Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a current folder inrandom order, rather than in theorder they are compressed in MP3or WMA. To activate folder randomplay, select the folder random modefrom the menu items. You will seeF-RANDOM in the display. Thesystem will then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play byselecting the normal play mode, oryou select a different folder with theFOLDER bar (CATEGORY bar onmodels with XM satellite radio).

Tocontinuously replay a track (file inMP3 or WMA mode), select thetrack repeat mode from the menuitems. You will see REPEAT in thedisplay. Select the normal play modeto turn it off.Pressing either side of the skip baralso turns off the repeat feature.

This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3 orWMA. To activate folder repeatmode, select the folder repeat modefrom the menu items. You will seeF-REPEAT in the display. Thesystem continuously replays thecurrent folder. Select the normalplay mode to turn it off. Selecting adifferent folder with the FOLDERbar (CATEGORY bar on modelswith XM satellite radio) also turnsoff the repeat feature.

This featurecontinuously replays the current disc.To active disc repeat, select the discrepeat mode from the menu items.You will see D-REPEAT in thedisplay. Select the normal play modeto turn it off.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, select the discrandom play from the menu items.You will see RANDOM in the display.Select the normal play mode toreturn to normal play.

CONTINUED

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode


FOLDER RANDOMREPEAT (Track Repeat)

FOLDER REPEAT

DISC REPEAT

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

Features

169

０７／０６／１５　１１：３１：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１７４　

－－

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc (all files in the selected folder inMP3 or WMA mode). To activate thescan feature, press and release theSCAN button. You will see SCAN inthe display. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file in thedisc/folder. Press and hold theSCAN button to get out of scanmode and play the last track sampled.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ineach folder on the disc in the orderthey are recorded. To activate thefolder scan feature, press andrelease the SCAN button repeatedly.You will see F-SCAN in the display.The system will then play the firstfile in the main folders for about 10seconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then play the followingfirst files for 10 seconds each. Whenit plays a file that you want tocontinue listening to, press and holdthe SCAN button.

You can also select the scan featurefrom the menu items with theselector knob (see page ).

You can also select the folder scanfeature from the menu items withthe selector knob (see page ).

Pressing either side of the skip bar,or selecting a different disc (usingthe preset buttons) or folder (usingthe FOLDER or CATEGORY bar)turns off the SCAN or F-SCANfeature.

168

168

In MP3 or WMA modeSCANF-SCAN


170

０７／０６／１５　１１：３１：５８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１７５　

－

CONTINUED

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first track ineach disc in order (the first file inthe main folder on each disc in MP3or WMA mode). To activate the discscan feature, press and release theSCAN button repeatedly untilD-SCAN shows in the display. Thesystem will then play the first track/file in the first main folder in the firstdisc for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then playthe following first tracks/files for 10seconds each. When it plays a track/file that you want to continuelistening to, press and hold theSCAN button again.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom scan, disc scan, then to normalplaying.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom file scan, folder scan, disc scan,then to normal playing.

When the first track in the last disc,or the first file in the last main folderin the last disc begins to play, thedisc scan mode will be canceled.Pressing either side of the skip baror selecting a different folder withthe FOLDER or CATEGORY baralso turns off the scan feature.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds. To beginplaying, press the CD (CD/AUX onmodels with XM satellite radio)button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM or FM button.Press the CD (CD/AUX on modelswith XM satellite radio) button againto switch back to the disc changer.

You can also select the disc scanfeature from the menu items withthe selector knob (see page ).168

In MP3 or WMA mode

D-SCAN To Stop Playing a Disc


Features

171

０７／０６／１５　１１：３２：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１７６　

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.


.To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject button. When a disc isremoved from a slot, the systemautomatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 10 seconds, the disc willreload into the slot. Then the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM,FM, or XM).

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset button. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton. Continue pressing the ejectbutton to remove all the discs fromthe changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.

206


Protecting DiscsRemoving Discs from the In-dashDisc Changer

172

０７／０６／１５　１１：３２：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１７７　

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For the additional information ondamaged discs, see page .


Cause SolutionErrorMessage

207

High temperature


Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 207 ). Insert the disc again. If thecode does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannotbe removed, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Changer Error Message (EX, EX-L and V6 models without navigation system)

Features

173

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTED

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL PUSH

EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNER’SMANUAL

０７／０６／１５　１１：３２：２０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１７８　

Most audio system functions can stillbe controlled by standard buttons,dials, and knobs, but some functionscan only be accessed using theinterface dial. The interface dial hastwo parts, a knob and a selector.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto make selections or adjustments toa list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left,right, up, down, and in. Use theselector to scroll through lists, toselect menus, and to highlight menuitems. When you make a selection,push the center of the selector(ENTER) to go to that selection.

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See theNavi section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

Interface Dial Voice Control System

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

174

ENTER

SELECTOR

KNOB

０７／０６／１５　１１：３２：２７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１７９　

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Features

175

INTERFACE DIAL

CENTER DISPLAY

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/AUTOSELECT) BAR

SKIP BAR

NAVIGATION SCREEN

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

TUNE BAR

FM/AM BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

０７／０６／２８　１０：０９：４３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１８０　

－The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Press the AUDIO button toview the audio control display. Turnthe system on by pressing thepower/volume knob or the FM/AMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the right side of the bar totune to a higher frequency, or theleft side to tune to a lower frequency.To tune with the interface dial, pushthe selector down, and turn the knobto TUNE icon. Then press ENTERon the selector, and turn the knob tothe desired frequency. To exit theTUNE mode, press ENTER on theselector.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are shown onthe display. To change bands, press

the FM/AM button. You can alsochange bands by pushing theinterface selector up. Each time youpush it up, the band will change toFM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,STEREO will be shown on thenavigation screen and ST on thecenter display, if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.


You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, skip (seek), scan, thepreset buttons, and auto select.On the FM band, you can also usethe features provided by the radiodata system (RDS). For moreinformation on the RDS, see page

.179


To Play the FM/AM Radio

TUNETo Select a Station

176

STEREO ICON BAND

TUNE ICON

０７／０６／１５　１１：３２：４２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１８１　

－

－－

CONTINUED

The skip (seek)function searches up and down fromthe current frequency to find astation with a strong signal. Toactivate it, press either side ( or

) of the skip bar, then release it.You can also activate the skipfunction (SEEK is displayed on thescreen) by pushing the interfaceselector to the right or left.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN side ofthe SCAN/A.SEL bar, then release it.

To scan with the interface dial, pushthe selector down, and then push itto the right. You will see SCANflashing on the screen.

The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and play itfor 10 seconds. When it plays astation that you want to listen to,press the scan side of the bar again,or push the interface selector to theright again.

Each preset button orpreset icon can store one frequencyon AM and two frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo sets of FM frequencies withthe preset buttons (on-screenicons).

1.To store a preset memory location:


SKIP (SEEK)

SCANPreset

Features

177

SCAN ICON

０７／０６／２８　１０：０９：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１８２　

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, orRDS function to tune the radio to adesired station.

Press the preset button, and holdit until you hear a beep. You canalso store frequencies with theinterface dial. Select the preseticon you want to store thefrequency on, then press ENTERon the interface selector, and holdit for more than 2 seconds.


Push the interface selector down toscroll down the screen, highlightA.SEL, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will seeA.SEL on the screen, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds.

press ENTERon the interface selector.

You can also press the A.SEL side ofthe SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will seeA.SEL on the screen, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. The system stores thefrequencies of six AM and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see ‘‘0’’ displayed if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons (icons) as previouslydescribed.

2.

3.

4.

To turn off auto select,

AUTO SELECT


178

A.SEL INDICATOR

PRESET ICON

A.SEL ICON

０７／０６／１５　１１：３２：５９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１８３　

CONTINUED

To switch the function between onand off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee the ‘‘PS ON’’ message on thecenter display. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thedisplayed frequency switches to thestation name.


The program service name displayfunction shows the name of thestation you are listening to. With theaudio system on and the FM bandselected, you can turn this functionon or off.

, press theA. SEL side of the bar. This restoresthe presets you originally set.


.209

To turn off auto select




179

PS ON MESSAGE

０７／０６／１５　１１：３３：０８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１８４　

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock musicCOUNTRY: Country musicSOFT: Adult hits and soft musicTOP 40: Top 40 of hitsOLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesR & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and bluesRELIGION: Religion music andreligion talkCLASSIC: Classical musicJAZZ: JazzINFO: News, information, sport, talk,foreign language, personality, public,college, and weatherTRAFFIC: Traffic information

On the FM band selected, you canselect the program type provided bythe RDS. Press the AUDIO button todisplay the radio information on thescreen. Push down the selector onthe interface dial, then turn the knobto select RDS SEARCH icon. PressENTER to set your selection. Theprincipal RDS categories are shownas follows;

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the audio screenand the center display continue toshow the frequency with the PSname display function on.

When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thecenter display shows ‘‘PS OFF.’’

ALL: All RDS category stations


Radio Data System (RDS) Category

180

RDS SEARCH ICON

０７／０６／１５　１１：３３：２０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１８５　

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

You can also select an RDS categorywith the CATEGORY bar. Presseither side ( or ) of theCATEGORY bar to display an RDScategory in the center display. Selecta category by pressing either side ofthe bar.

This function searches up and downa frequency for the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry theselected RDS category information.This can help you to find a station inyour favorite category. To activate it,press and release either side( or ) of the SKIP bar. Youwill also see the selected RDScategory name blinking in the centerdisplay while searching it. When thesystem finds a station, the selectedRDS category name will be displayedagain for about 5 seconds in thecenter display.


Turn the selector to select an RDScategory. You can use search or scanfunction to find radio stations on theselected RDS category by pressingthe selector to the right repeatedly.Press ENTER to set your selection.If you do nothing while the RDScategory is selected, the selectedcategory is cancelled.


RDS Program SearchF

eatures

181

RDS CATEGORYRDS CATEGORY

０７／０６／１５　１１：３３：２８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１８６　

To activate RDS program searchwith the interface dial, push theAUDIO button to display the FMradio information on the screen.Push the selector down, and turn theknob to select RDS SEARCH icon.Press ENTER on the selector. Thescreen shows you the RDS categorylist.

Turn the knob to the desired RDScategory. The scan function samples all

stations with strong signals on theselected RDS category. To activate it,press and release the SCAN side ofthe SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will seeSCAN in the center display. Thesystem will scan for a station with astrong signal in the selected RDScategory. You will also see theselected RDS category nameblinking in the center display whilesearching it. When the system findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

While the RDS category is selected,push the selector knob to the right toselect the SEEK/SCAN icondisplayed on the upper right of thescreen. Press and release theselector knob to the right repeatedlyto switch the icon between SEEKand SCAN. Select SEEK, then pressENTER to activate the searchfunction.


RDS Program SCAN

182

SEEK/SCAN ICON

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SEEK is selected.

０７／０６／１５　１１：３３：３４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１８７　

Turn the knob to the desired RDScategory.

To activate RDS program scan withthe interface dial, push the AUDIObutton to display the FM radioinformation on the screen. Push theselector down, and turn the knob toselect RDS SEARCH icon. PressENTER on the selector. The screenshows you the RDS category list.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar again.


While the RDS category is selected,push the selector knob to the right toselect the SEEK/SCAN icondisplayed on the upper right of thescreen. Press and release theselector knob to the right repeatedlyto switch the icon between SEEKand SCAN. Select SCAN, then pressENTER to activate the scan function.


CONTINUED


Features

183

SEEK/SCAN ICON

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SCAN is selected.

０７／０６／１５　１４：５２：５６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１８８　

This function displays the radio textinformation of the selected RDSstation.

To activate radio text display, usethe interface dial. Push the selectordown, and turn the knob to selectRADIO TEXT icon. Press ENTER onthe selector to enter the setting.

The display shows up to about 64characters of text data on theselected RDS station.

If the selected RDS station has theradio text information, you will seethe text indicator on the screen.

Radio Text Display


184

The text is displayedaccording to theinformation from RDS.

RADIO TEXT ICON

TEXT INDICATOR

０７／０６／１５　１１：３３：４８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１８９　

To adjust them, press the AUDIObutton, push the interface selectordown, and turn the interface knob toSOUND. Then press ENTER on theselector.

BASS, TREBLE, FADER, andBALANCE are each adjustable. Youcan also adjust the strength of thesound coming from the subwooferspeaker. In addition, you can set thespeed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC).

These adjustments can be made bythe SOUND button or the interfacedial.

Select the mode you want to adjustby turning the interface dial.

You can also adjust the sound bypushing the SOUND buttonrepeatedly. Each mode is shown inthe center display as it changes.Turn the power/volume knob toadjust the setting to your liking.When the level reaches the center,you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.The system will return to the audioplaying mode in the center displayabout 10 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Sound


Features

185

SOUND ICON

０７／０６／２８　１０：１０：０１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１９０　

－－

－

To adjust bassand treble, select BASS or TREBLE,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. The current setting isshown on the display. Turn theinterface knob to the desired level,and enter your selection by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Thesemodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.Fader adjusts the front-to-backstrength, while balance adjusts theside-to-side strength. To adjust faderand balance, select FADER orBALANCE, then press ENTER onthe interface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the screen. Turnthe interface knob to the desiredlevel, and enter your selection bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector. To equalize the fader orbalance, turn the interface knob untilthe marks on the sound grid come tothe center of the adjustment bar.

To adjust thestrength of the sound from thesubwoofer speaker, select it andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. Turn the interface knob tothe desired level, and enter yourselection by pressing ENTER on theinterface selector.


The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. The default setting is MID.To change the SVC mode, selectSVC, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the screen. Turnthe interface knob to the desiredlevel, and enter your selection bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector. If you feel the sound is tooloud, choose low. If you feel thesound is too quiet, choose high.

BASS/TREBLE FADER/BALANCE

SUBWOOFER

Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)


186

０７／０６／１５　１１：３４：０３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１９１　

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (Models with navigation system)

Features

187

AUDIO BUTTON INTERFACE DIALTUNE BAR

CATEGORY BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

TITLE BUTTON

XM RADIO BUTTON

SKIP BAR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB


０７／０６／２８　１０：１０：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１９２　

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, and Canada, exceptHawaii and Alaska. XM is aregistered trade mark of XMSatellite Radio, Inc.

XM Satellite Radio receives signalsfrom two satellites to produce clear,high-quality digital reception. Itoffers many channels in severalcategories. Along with a largeselection of different types of music,XM Satellite Radio also allows you toview channel and category selectionsin the audio display.

Push the AUDIO button to displayXM information on the screen. Youcan operate the XM Satellite Radiosystem with the interface dial.

To listen to XM satellite radio, turnthe ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,and press the button. Thelast channel you listened to will showin the audio screen and the centerdisplay. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

Operating the XM Radio


188

０７／０６／１５　１１：３４：１５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１９３　

－

－

－To switch between thecategory mode and channel mode,press and hold the TITLE buttonuntil the mode changes. TheCATEGORY or CHANNEL mode isdisplayed on the screen. To switchthe mode with the interface dial,push down the interface selector toselect AUDIO MENU, then turn theknob to select MODE, and pressENTER on the selector repeatedly.

In the category mode, such as Jazz,Rock, Classical, etc., you cannavigate through all of the channelswithin that category. In the channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels.

Each time you press and release theTITLE button, the center displaychanges in the following sequence:NAME (artist name), TITLE (musictitle), and CHANNEL NAME(channel name).

On the screen, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

Press either side of theTUNE bar to change channelselections. Press the side of thebar for higher numbered channelsand the side for lowernumbered channels. You can alsochange channels with the interfaceselector, push down the interfaceselector to select AUDIO MENU,then turn the interface knob tochoose TUNE and press ENTER onthe selector. Turn the interface knobto the appropriate direction. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

Push down theinterface selector to select AUDIOMENU, then turn the interface knobto select CHANNEL LIST and pressENTER on the selector. Turn theinterface knob to select a channel,then press ENTER to set yourselection.

CONTINUED

MODE

TUNE

CHANNEL LIST


Features

189

０７／０６／１５　１１：３４：２１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１９４　

－

▼ ▲ －

－

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:Press the button or scrollup by pushing the interfaceselector up. Either XM1 or XM2will be shown on the display.

Presseither side of the bar to selectanother category. You can alsochange a category by pushing theinterface selector left or right.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activateSCAN, press the SCAN side of theSCAN/A.SEL bar. To scan with theinterface dial, scroll down, and pushinterface selector to the right. Youwill see SCAN on the screen andcenter display.

The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, push theinterface selector to the right againor press the SCAN side of the bar tocancel.

Use the tune, skip (seek), or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe preset button until you hear abeep. You can also pick thenumber with the interface dial.Select your desired number andpress and hold ENTER on theinterface selector.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can beselected. In channel mode, allchannels can be selected.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Preset

CATEGORY ( or )

SCAN


190

XM BAND

０７／０６／１５　１１：３４：３１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１９５　

－

－

－

－

－

－

The signal iscurrently tooweak. Move thevehicle to an areaaway from tallbuildings, andwith anunobstructed viewof the southernhorizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, oris not part of yoursubscription, or thischannel has no artist ortitle information at thistime.

There is a problemwith the XMantenna. Pleaseconsult your dealer.

XM is loading theaudio or programinformation.

The channelcurrently selected isno longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is beingupdated. Waituntil theencryption code isfully updated.Channels 0 and 1should still worknormally.

Press the button or scrollup again. The other XM band willbe shown. Store the next sixchannels using steps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, pressand release the proper presetbutton to tune to it.

5.

CONTINUED

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’


Features

191

０７／０６／１５　１１：３４：３９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１９６　

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Driving in tunnels.

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.


192

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０７／０６／１５　１１：３４：４５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１９７　

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, CAT(category) or CH (channel) willappear in the center display, andyou’ll be able to listen to XM Radiobroadcasts. XM Radio will continueto send an activation signal to yourvehicle for at least 12 hours from theactivation request. If the service hasnot been activated after 36 hours,contact XM Radio.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position, press the

button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact

, or call 1-877-438-9677. You will need to give themyour radio I.D. number and yourcredit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, press and releasethe side of the TUNE bar until‘‘0’’ appears in the display. Your I.D.will appear in the display.


www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Receiving XM Satellite RadioService


Features

193

０７／０６／２８　１０：１０：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１９８　

Playing Discs (Models with navigation system)

194

SKIP BAR


POWER/VOLUME KNOB

CD BUTTON

INTERFACE DIALAUDIO BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

NAVIGATION SCREEN

CENTER DISPLAY

TITLE BUTTON

DISC SLOT

DISC LOAD BUTTON DISC EJECT BUTTON

０７／０６／２８　１０：１０：２２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０１９９　

Your vehicle’s audio system has anin-dash disc changer with the samecontrols used for the radio. Tooperate the disc changer, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc changer can play these discformats:

CD (CD-DA)MP3/WMA

The disc packages or jackets shouldhave one of these marks.

When playing a disc in MP3, you willsee ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay.

The changer can also play MP3 orWMA format (see page ).

NOTE:If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audiosystem displays UNSUPPORTED inthe center display, and then skips tothe next file.

Video CDs and DVD discs will notwork in this unit.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixeddiscs are not playable.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

201


Features

195


０７／０６／１５　１１：３５：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２００　

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position, press and hold the LOADbutton until you hear a beep andsee ‘‘LOAD’’ in the center display,then release the button.

‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screenfor an empty position in thechanger. When the green loadindicator comes on and you see‘‘LOAD’’ in the center display,insert the disc into the slot. Insertit only about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

Press and release the LOADbutton.

To load a single disc:

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system willthen begin playing the last discloaded.

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 10 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

Insert a disc into the slot. Insert itonly about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way. Youwill see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the centerdisplay. When you insert the firstdisc, the changer will start to playthe disc.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

You can select the position to load adisc. Turn the interface knob orpress a preset button to select theposition, then press ENTER on theselector. This starts the loadingsequence. If you do not select theposition, the system loads the disc tothe first empty position in numericalorder.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could damagethe audio unit.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thecenter display again, insert thenext disc into the slot.

1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.

Loading Discs in the Changer


196

０７／０６／１５　１１：３５：１９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２０１　

When you play CD-TEXT, you willsee the track name, artist name, andalbum name on the screen. Whenyou play MP3/WMA discs, you willsee the track name and folder nameon the screen. If the disc was notrecorded with this information, it willnot be displayed.

The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3,and WMA formats.

Select the changer by pressing theCD button. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in thedisc changer. You will see thecurrent disc position highlighted.

To select a different disc, press thecorresponding number on the presetbuttons, or turn the interface knob tohighlight the desired disc number,then press ENTER on the interfaceselector.

Each time you press and release theside of the skip bar or push the

interface selector to the right, theplayer skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side of the skipbar or push the interface selector tothe left to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressthe side or push the interfaceselector to the left again to skip tothe previous track. To move rapidlywithin a track, press and hold eitherside of the skip bar.

To Play a Disc To Change Tracks


Features

197

CURRENT DISC

０７／０６／１５　１１：３５：２６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２０２　

You can also choose a track directlyfrom a track list. Press ENTER onthe interface selector, and the tracklist screen will be shown. If there areno track names, track numbers aredisplayed. You will see the currenttrack is highlighted. Turn theinterface knob to select the desiredtrack, then press ENTER on theinterface selector.

To exit the track list display, pressthe AUDIO button, or push theinterface selector to the left.

When you press the SCAN side ofthe SCAN/A. SEL bar or scroll downand push the interface selector tothe left, the next track of the currenttrack plays for about 10 seconds.You will see SCAN next to TRACKon the screen and center display. Tolisten to the rest of the track, pressand hold the SCAN side of the baruntil you hear a beep or push theinterface selector to the left againwithin 10 seconds.

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next track, plays about 10seconds of it, and continues throughthe rest of the tracks the same way.

When you press the SCAN side ofthe SCAN/A. SEL bar repeatedlyuntil you see D-SCAN in the centerdisplay, or push down the interfaceselector to the right, the first track ofthe current disc plays for about 10seconds. You will see SCAN next toDISC on the screen. The discnumber is blinking and SCAN is alsoshown in the center display. To listento the rest of the disc, press and holdthe SCAN side of the bar until youhear a beep, or push down theinterface selector to the right againwithin 10 seconds.

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next disc, plays about 10 secondsof its first track, and continuesthrough the rest of the discs thesame way. When the system reachesthe last disc, DISC SCAN is canceled,and that disc continues to play.

To Choose a Track

Track Scan

Disc Scan


198

０７／０６／２８　１０：１０：２９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２０３　

You can select any type of repeat andrandom modes by using theinterface dial.Push the AUDIO button to displaythe audio information on the screen,then scroll down by pushing downthe selector to select the audio menu.

Turn the interface knob to select adesired repeat or random mode, thenpress ENTER to set your selection.

To cancel the selected repeat orrandom mode, have the selectedmode highlighted, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

To replay the current trackcontinuously, select TRACKREPEAT, and press ENTER on theinterface selector. As a reminder,you will see REPEAT next toTRACK on the screen. To turn thisfeature off, highlight TRACKREPEAT (if not already highlighted),and press ENTER on the interfaceselector again.

To select repeat or random mode: Track Repeat


Features

199

AUDIO MENU SCREENPush down the selector.

０７／０６／１５　１１：３５：４１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２０４　

To replay the current disccontinuously, select DISC REPEAT,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. As a reminder, you will seeREPEAT next to DISC on the screen.To turn this feature off, highlightDISC REPEAT (if not alreadyhighlighted), and press ENTER onthe interface selector again.

To play the tracks of the current discin random order, select TRACKRANDOM, and press ENTER on theinterface selector. As a reminder,you will see RANDOM next toTRACK on the screen. To turn thisfeature off, highlight TRACKRANDOM (if not alreadyhighlighted), and press ENTER onthe interface selector again.

To take the system out of disc mode,press the FM/AM button, the

button, or the AUX button.To return to disc mode, press the CDbutton.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or the ignitionswitch, play will continue at the samepoint when you turn it back on.

Disc Repeat Random Play To Stop Playing a Disc


200

０７／０６／２８　１０：１１：２３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２０５　

The changer plays MP3/WMA filesin recorded order. Each disc canhold up to 400 playable files within 8folder layers. When playing MP3discs, a disc can support a maximumnumber of 100 folders, and eachfolder can hold 255 playable files.

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz(MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:Sampling frequency: 22.05/32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate: 32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bit rate andmulti-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

To play an MP3/WMA disc, use thedisc controls previously described,along with the following information.

While playing an MP3/WMA disc,you can select a folder within thedisc by pressing either side of thecategory bar. Each time you presseither side of the bar, the folder titleand its first file’s information appearin the center display in recordedorder.

CONTINUED

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc Changing the Folders


Features

201

０７／０６／１５　１１：３５：５８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２０６　

Changing and Selecting the Folders/Files

Using the interface selector, you cansee the list of all the files and folderswithin a disc. While playing a MP3/WMA disc, press the AUDIO button.The currently playing folder and fileinformation comes on the screen.

Push the selector to show the folderlist. Turn the selector knob,highlight the folder you want to seethe information within, and pressENTER.

If the main folder has someadditional folders in the lower layer,you can also see each lower folderlisted on the screen.

You can see the list of all the files inthe selected folder. Turn the selectorknob, then press ENTER to set yourselection.


202

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

CURRENT TRACK

CURRENT FOLDER

０７／０６／１５　１１：３６：０６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２０７　

This feature, when activated, playsall files in the current folder inrandom order. To activate folderrandom play, select FOLDERRANDOM by interface knob, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. You will see RANDOMnext to FOLDER on the screen. Toturn this feature off, highlightFOLDER RANDOM (if not alreadyhighlighted), and press ENTER onthe interface selector again.

This feature, when activated, replaysall files on the selected folder. Toactivate folder repeat mode, selectFOLDER REPEAT by interfaceknob, and press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will seeREPEAT next to FOLDER on thescreen. To turn this feature off,highlight FOLDER REPEAT (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.

This feature, when activated,samples the first file of each folderfor 10 seconds. To scan a folder,press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A. SEL bar repeatedly. You will seeSCAN next to FOLDER and thefolder number blinking.

To select any type of the repeatmodes, use the interface dial. Formore information, see page .

To select any type of the randommodes, use the interface dial. Formore information, see page .

To listen to the rest of the folder,press and hold the SCAN side of thebar until you hear a beep. If you donot, the system advances to the nextfolder, plays 10 seconds of it, andcontinues throughout the rest of thefolder in the same way. When thesystem samples the first file of allfolders, folder scan is canceled, andthe last file played continues to play.

199 199

Folder RandomFolder RepeatFolder Scan


Features

203

０７／０６／２８　１０：１１：３０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２０８　

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off:To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until you hear a beep.

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe corresponding number on thepreset button or turning theinterface knob, and pressing ENTERon the interface selector. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton.

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the centerdisplay. When you remove the discfrom the slot, the systemautomatically enters the previousmode AM, FM1, FM2, or XMSatellite Radio. The system alsobegins the load sequence so you canload another disc. If you do not loadanother disc, the load sequence iscanceled, and the system continuesplaying in the previous mode.

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 10 seconds. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.


Removing Discs from theChanger

204

０７／０６／１５　１１：３６：２０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２０９　

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thecenter display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in thecenter display while playing a disc,press the eject button. After ejectingthe disc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For the additional information ondamaged discs, see page .


ErrorMessage

Cause Solution

207

High Temperature


Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 207 ). Insert the disc again. If thecode does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannotbe removed, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

Disc Changer Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

Features

205

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTED

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL PUSH

EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNER’SMANUAL

０７／０６／１５　１１：３６：２７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２１０　

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by the discchanger.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc changer.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd-shaped discs may jam in the driveor cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

206


０７／０６／１５　１１：３６：３６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２１１　

The in-dash disc player/changer hasa sophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information ofRecommended Discs


Features

207

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

Bubbled/Wrinkled

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

With PlasticRing

０７／０６／１５　１１：３６：４７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２１２　

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

This audio unit cannot play a Dual-disc .

4. 5.


208

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

０７／０６／１５　１１：３６：５８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２１３　

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

CONTINUED

FM/AM Radio Frequencies FM/AM Radio Reception

FM/AM Radio Reception

Features

209

０７／０６／１５　１１：３７：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２１４　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.


FM/AM Radio Reception

210

０７／０６／１５　１１：３７：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２１５　

▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,or disc (if a disc(s) is loaded). Onmodels with satellite radio system,you can also select XM1 and XM2.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation. If you press and hold the CHbutton ( ) or ( ), the system goesinto the skip (seek) mode. It finds astation with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA format)each time you press the top ( ) ofthe CH button. Press the bottom( ) to return to the beginning of thecurrent track/file. Press it twice toreturn to the previous track/file.

You will see the track/file numberand the elapsed time. If the disc hastext data or is compressed in MP3 orWMA, you can also see any otherinformation (track title, file name,folder name, etc.).

CONTINUED

Remote Audio Controls

Features

211

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：３７：２０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２１６　

＋

－

＋

－

The auxiliary input jack is inside theconsole compartment. The systemwill accept auxiliary input fromstandard audio accessories.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXor CD/AUX button to select it.

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe skip function to select folders.Press and hold the top ( ) of theCH button until you hear a beep, toskip forward to the first file of thenext folder. Press the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous folder.

If you are playing a conventional CD(without the text data and notcompressed in MP3 or WMA), youcan use the skip function to selectdiscs. Press and hold the top ( ) ofthe CH button until you hear a beep,to skip forward to the next disc.Press and hold the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous disc.

On models with in-dash disc changer

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

Auxiliary Input Jack

212

０７／０６／１５　１１：３７：２６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２１７　

Your vehicle’s audio system maydisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code withthe preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from the fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a radiocode card that lists your audiosystem’s code and serial numbers. Itis best to store this card in a safeplace at home. In addition, youshould write the audio system’sserial number in this owner’s manual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from your dealer.To do this, you will need the audiosystem’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, or the radiofuse is removed, the audio systemwill disable itself. If this happens,you will see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display (on the screen onmodels with navigation system) thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons to enter thefive-digit code. The code is on theradio code card included in yourowner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

The system will retain your AM andFM presets even if power isdisconnected.

Except LX and LX-P

Radio Theft Protection

Features

213

０７／０６／１５　１１：３７：３２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２１８　

To set the time, press the CLOCKbutton until you hear a beep. Thedisplayed time begins to blink.

Change the hours by pressing the H(hour) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(minute) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again toenter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press and holdthe CLOCK button, then press the Rbutton to set the time back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, the sameprocedure sets the time forward tothe beginning of the next hour.

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

For example: On models with navigation system


Setting the Clock

214


MINUTE BUTTON(PRESET 5)EX-L is shown.

CLOCK BUTTON

RESET BUTTON(PRESET 6)

HOUR BUTTON(PRESET 4)

０７／０６／１５　１１：３７：４１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２１９　

△

You can also adjust the clock andswitch the clock display between 24-hours and 12-hours in the menumode.

To adjust the clock setting:

Press and release the MENUbutton. The display shows you themenu items.

You can adjust the clock settingwith the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

Turn the selector knob to select‘‘CLOCK ADJUST.’’

Press the selector knob to enteryour selection. The displaychanges to the clock adjustingdisplay.

Turn the selector knob to selectthe item which you want to adjust.Turning the knob will change theselected item between the clockdisplay setting, hours, minutes,and SET. The selected item isindicated with in the display.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

EX, EX-L and all V6 models withoutnavigation systemAdjusting the Clock with MENUButton

Setting the Clock

Features

215

０７／０６／１５　１１：３７：５１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２２０　

To set the time, turn the selectorknob and select the hours or theminutes, then press the knob toenter your selection. The displaychanges to the setting display.

Turn the selector knob up or downto count the numbers up or down.

Press the selector knob to enteryour selection. The display willreturn to the clock adjustingdisplay.

While setting, pressing theRETURN button will go back tothe previous display.Pressing the MENU button againwill cancel this setting mode.

Turn the selector knob to changethe setting between 12H and 24H.

Press the selector knob to enteryour selection. The display willreturn to the clock adjustingdisplay.

To enter the clock setting, turnthe selector knob to select ‘‘SET,’’then press the knob. The displaywill return to the menu itemdisplay.

Press either of the RETURN orMENU button to go back to thenormal display.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Setting the Clock

216

MINUTE SETTING

０７／０６／１５　１１：３８：０３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２２１　

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk lock is forced, or the trunk isopened with the trunk release leveror the emergency trunk opener.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the audio unit.This alarm continues for twominutes, then the system resets. Toreset an alarming system before thetwo minutes have elapsed, unlockthe driver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,driver’s lock tab, door lock masterswitch, or remote transmitter. Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), thehood, or the trunk will cause thesystem to alarm. It also alarms if theaudio unit is removed from thedashboard or the wiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the door and trunk openmonitor on the instrument panel (seepage ) to see if the doors andtrunk are fully closed. Since it is notpart of the monitor display, manuallycheck the hood.

60

CONTINUED

Except LX

Security System

Features

217


０７／０６／１５　１１：３８：１０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２２２　

Use the remote transmitterto quickly check that the hood, thetrunk, and all doors are closed. Pushthe lock button twice within 5seconds. There should be an audibleconfirmation beep.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

Security System

218

NOTE:

０７／０６／１５　１１：３８：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２２３　

CONTINUED

Compass operation can be affectedby driving near power lines orstations, across bridges, throughtunnels, over railroad crossings, pastlarge vehicles, or driving near largeobjects that can cause a magneticdisturbance. It can also be affectedby accessories such as antennas androof racks that are mounted bymagnets.


Press and hold the MENU buttonfor about 5 seconds until you heara beep. The display shows you thecompass setting menu items.

The compass may need to bemanually calibrated after exposure toa strong magnetic field. If thecompass seems to be continuallyshowing the wrong direction and isnot self-calibrating, or the compassdisplay is blinking with the CALindicator on, do the following.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the compass isself-calibrating, then the compassdisplay is shown in the display.

1.

2.

EX-L and EX-L V6 without navigationsystem

Compass

Compass Operation

Compass CalibrationF

eatures

219

COMPASS COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS

０７／０６／１５　１１：３８：２３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２２４　

Turn the selector knob to select‘‘CALIBRATION.’’

Press the selector knob to enteryour selection. The display showsyou ‘‘PUSH CAL START.’’

While setting, pressing theRETURN button will go back tothe previous display. Pressing theMENU button will cancel thecompass setting mode.

Do this procedure in an openarea, away from buildings, powerlines, and other vehicles.

The audio system is not related tothe compass system. Even if thecompass system is calibrating, thedisplay returns to the normal displaywhich you last selected.

When the calibration is successfullycompleted, the CAL indicator goesoff and the compass display will stopblinking and show an actual heading.

Drive the vehicle slowly in twocomplete circles.

Press the selector knob. Thecompass display is blinking andthe CAL indicator is shown.

5.

6.

4.3.

Compass

220

NOTE:

０７／０６／１５　１１：３８：３２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２２５　

In most areas, there is a variationbetween magnetic north and truenorth. Zone selection is required sothe compass can compensate for thisvariation. To check and select thezone, do this:

Once the correct zone is displayed,press the selector knob. Thedisplay then returns to normal.


Press and hold the MENU buttonfor about 5 seconds until you heara beep. The display shows you thecompass setting menu items.

Turn the selector knob to select‘‘ZONE.’’ Press the selector knobto enter your selection. Thedisplay shows you the currentlyselected zone number.

Find the zone for your area on themap (see page ). If the correctzone is not shown, turn theselector knob to cycle the zonelists up or down.

If necessary, press the RETURNbutton to return to the previousdisplay. Pressing the MENUbutton will cancel the compasssetting mode.

4. 5.

1.

2.

3.

222

CONTINUED

Compass

Compass Zone SelectionF

eatures

221

ZONE NUMBER

０７／０６／１５　１１：３８：４２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２２６　

The audio system is not related tothe compass system. Even if thecompass system is in the zonesetting mode, the display returns tothe normal display which you lastselected.

Compass

222

Zone Map

０７／０６／１５　１１：３８：４６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２２７　

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

The cruise control system can beleft on, even when it is not in use.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features

223

RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０７／０６／１５　１１：３８：５４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２２８　

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel cruise control. To resumethe set speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed

224

NOTE:

０７／０６／１５　１１：３９：０３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２２９　

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Cruise Control

Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise ControlF

eatures

225

０７／０６／１５　１１：３９：１０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２３０　

×

The HomeLink universaltransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

Refer to the safety information thatcame with your garage door openerto test that the safety features arefunctioning properly. If you do nothave this information, contact themanufacturer of the equipment.Before programming HomeLink to agarage door or gate opener, makesure that people and objects are outof the way of the device to preventpotential injury or damage.When programming a garage dooropener, park just outside the garage.

Before programming yourHomeLink to operate a garage dooropener, confirm that the opener hasan external entrapment protectionsystem, such as an ‘‘electronic eye,’’or other safety and reverse stopfeatures.

If your garage door wasmanufactured before April 1, 1982,you may not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. These unitsdo not have safety features thatcause the motor to stop and reverseit if an obstacle is detected duringclosing, increasing the risk of injury.

Do not use HomeLink with anygarage door opener that lacks safetystop and reverse features.

Units manufactured between April 1,1982 and January 1, 1993 may beequipped with safety stop andreverse features. If your unit doesnot have an external entrapmentprotection system, an easy test toconfirm the function andperformance of the safety stop andreverse feature is to lay a 2 4under the closing door. The doorshould stop and reverse uponcontacting the piece of wood.As an additional safety feature,garage door openers manufacturedafter January 1, 1993 are required tohave external entrapment protectionsystems, such as an electronic eye,which detect an object obstructingthe door.

EX-L V6

General Information


HomeLink Universal Transceiver

226

０７／０６／１５　１１：３９：１７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２３１　

－

－

CONTINUED

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 4.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remote

transmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 3.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 10 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote transmitter 1 to 3inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 1 thru 3.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 4.

2.

1.

3.


Training HomeLinkBefore you begin

Features

227

RED INDICATOR

０７／０６／１５　１８：０５：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２３２　

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener is needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘learn’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).

Test the HomeLink button bypushing it for about 1 second.

If the button works,programming is complete.

If the button does not work goto step 5.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.

If the indicator stays on, pressthe HomeLink button again; theremotely controlled deviceshould operate.

If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System.’’

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.


Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

228

０７／０６／１５　１１：３９：３６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２３３　

CONTINUED

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press the HomeLink button againfor about 1 second. It shouldoperate the garage door.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

1.

4.

5.

3.


Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button

Features

229

LEARN BUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：３９：４４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２３４　




www.homelink.com.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go to

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 2 thru 5 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

2.

227


Customer Assistance

230

０７／０６／１５　１１：３９：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２３５　

HFL recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFL.The HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth,which means the maximum rangebetween your phone and vehicle is30 feet (10 meters).

To use the HFL, your phone musthave approved Bluetooth capabilityalong with the Hands Free Profile.This type of phone is availablethrough many phone makers andcellular carriers. You can also find anapproved phone by visiting

, or by callingthe Hands Free Link consumersupport at (888) 528-7876. In Canada,visit , or call (888) 9-HONDA-9.

Your vehicle is equipped with theBluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL).HFL uses Bluetooth technology tolink your cellphone to your vehicle.With HFL, you can place and receivecalls through your vehicle’s audiosystem, without the distraction ofhandling your cellphone. To use thisfeature, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cellphone with the HandsFree Profile. For more information,and a list of compatible cellphones,visit , or call(888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit

, or call (888) 9-HONDA-9.The HFL is available in both Englishand French (Canadian models only).To change the language, see page

.

Here are the main features of theHFL. Instructions for using the HFLbegin on page .

The Bluetooth word mark andlogos are registered trademarksowned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. andany use of such marks by HondaMotor Co., Ltd. is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

With a linked phone, the HFL allowsyou to send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

234

256

241

handsfreelink.honda.com

www.honda.ca

handsfreelink.honda.comwww.

honda.ca

EX-L and EX-L V6 with navigationsystem

Voice Control

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

Features

231

０７／０６／２８　１０：１１：４０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２３６　

To operate the HFL, use the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

The HFL buttons are used asfollows:

HFL Talk: This button is used beforeyou give a command, to answerincoming calls, and to confirmsystem information.

The HFL microphone is on theceiling, between the front spotlights.The microphone is shared with thenavigation system.

When the HFL is in use, the soundcomes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while operatingeither of the HFL buttons or makinga call, the HFL over-rides the audiosystem. To change the volume level,use the audio system volume knob,or the steering wheel volumecontrols.

You can also store the desirednumber to the HFL directly fromyour cellphone using the receivecontact function in the HFL.

Your vehicle’s HFL system has thecellular phonebook import function.This allows you to import yourcellular phonebook to the HFL.Using the navigation system, you canmake a call directly and store adesired number in the HFL from thelist shown on the navigation display.For more information on how toimport the phonebook or to make acall, see page .

The HFL can store up to 50 namesand phone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

241

HFL ButtonsMicrophone

Audio System

Phonebook


232

HFL TALK BUTTON

HFL BACK BUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：４０：１０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２３７　

You will also see ‘‘HANDS FREELINK’’ on the center display.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

Press and release the button, thenwait for a beep before giving acommand.

When you are operating the HFL,dialing or receiving calls with theaudio system in use, you will see theabove screen on the navigationdisplay.

‘‘ ’’ indicator will be displayed onthe center display if your phone islinked to the Bluetooth compatiblecell phone.

Information Display


Features

233

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

０７／０６／１５　１１：４０：１８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２３８　

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

The HFL is operated by the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. The nextfew pages provide instructions for allbasic features of the HFL.

Adjust the airflow from both thedashboard and side vents so theydo not blow against themicrophone on the ceiling.

After pressing the Talk button,wait for the beep, then give a voicecommand.

Give a voice command in a clearnatural speaking voice withoutpausing between words ornumbers. If the system cannotrecognize your command becauseof the background noise, speaklouder.

If the microphone picks up voicesother than yours, the system maynot interpret your voicecommands correctly.

If the HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’If it doesn’t recognize thecommand a second time, itsresponse is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If itdoesn’t recognize the command athird time, it plays the Helpprompt.

Close the windows and themoonroof.

To enter a command, press andrelease the Talk button. Then,after the beep, say your commandin a clear, natural tone.

Lower the A/C fan speed duringvoice recognition operation.

Using Voice ControlHow to Use the HFL

All phones may notoperate identically, and somemay cause inconsistentoperation of the HFL.


234

NOTE:

０７／０６／１５　１１：４０：２６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２３９　

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, and 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFL isspeaking. The HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.If nothing is said while the HFL islistening for a command, the HFLwill time out and stop its voicerecognition. The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins listening from the point atwhich it timed out.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press and release theTalk button, wait for the beep, andsay, ‘‘Cancel.’’ The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins from its main menu.

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFL goes back toits main menu. For example, whenyou store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ theHFL response is, ‘‘Eric has beenstored.’’ The next time you pressthe Talk button, you will be at themain menu.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Handsfree help.’’


Features

235

０７／０６／１５　１１：４０：３２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２４０　

The voice of the HFL can be set tomale or female (U.S. models only).Also, the incoming notification canbe set to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you likemale or female prompts?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or‘‘Female,’’ depending on thesystem voice you want. The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Male (Female)prompts have been selected.Would you like an audiblenotification of an incoming call?’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFL response is, ‘‘Would you likethe notification to be a ring tone orprompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’ after thebeep, the HFL returns to its mainmenu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will result in noring tone or prompt playbackduring an incoming call. The audiosystem will still mute, and amessage will be displayed.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Aring tone will be used’’ or ‘‘Anincoming call prompt will be used.’’If you choose ‘‘Ring tone,’’ you willhear a ring tone through the audiospeakers to announce an incomingcall. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ youwill hear this message toannounce an incoming call: ‘‘Youhave an incoming call.’’

The HFL response continues ‘‘Asecurity option is available to lockthe HFL system. Each time thevehicle is turned on, a passcodewould be required to use thissystem. Would you like thissecurity option turned on?’’ If yousay ‘‘Yes,’’ you can set yourpasscode. Refer to the settingprocedure in the next column.

4.

5.3.

2.

1.

6.

To set up the system, do this:

Setting Up the System


236

０７／０６／１５　１１：４０：４０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２４１　

The HFL will accept a numeric, four-digit passcode that you can use forsecurity purposes.

Follow the system setupprocedure as described previously.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘What is thefour-digit number you would liketo set as your passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitpasscode you want to use. Forexample, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is thiscorrect?’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘No.’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘Security will notbe used. The system setup iscomplete.’’

Once a passcode is set, you can lockthe HFL so it only operates after thepasscode is entered.

The HFL will prompt you for yourpasscode each time the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON (II)position and you press the Talkbutton. You will only be asked forthe passcode once per ignition

cycle. If the passcode is set, itsresponse is ‘‘The system is locked.What is the four-digit passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say your four-digitpasscode. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3,4.’’

If the passcode is correct, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Main menu.’’ If thepasscode is not correct, the HFLresponse is ‘‘1,2,3,4 is incorrect.Please try again.’’ Go back to thestep 2.

If you forget your passcode and youcannot activate the HFL, consultyour dealer to cancel the passcode.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Security is on.Each time the vehicle is turned on,the passcode will be required touse the system. The system setupis complete. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

1.

4.

5.

6.2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

To set your passcode, do this:

To enter your passcode, do this;

Setting Your Passcode


Features

237

０７／０６／１５　１１：４０：５０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２４２　

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith HandsFree Profile must bepaired to the HFL before you canmake and receive hands-free calls.To confirm that your phone isBluetooth compatible, visit

, or call (888)528-7876. In Canada, call (888) 9-HONDA-9. Your phone retailershould also be able to confirm thatyour phone is Bluetooth compatible.

The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, visit

, call theHands Free Link consumersupport at (888) 528-7876, or callyour phone retailer. In Canada,call (888) 9-HONDA-9.

Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.

For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.

During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone setup optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The pairingprocess requires operation of yourmobile phone. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note this

code. It will be requested by thephone.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘HFL is nowsearching for a Bluetooth phone.Make sure the phone you aretrying to pair is in discovery mode.’’

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

3.

1.

2.

4.


handsfreelink.honda.comPairing Your Phone


238

NOTE:

NOTE:

０７／０６／１５　１４：５３：１５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２４３　

To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Which phonewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew name for Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘The name has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Which phonewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you liketo delete Eric’s phone?’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFL response is‘‘A new phone has been found.What would you like to name thisphone?’’

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Discovery mode.The phone will search for the HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

2.

1. 1.

2.6.

7.

8.

3.

4.

3.

5.

CONTINUED


Features

239

０７／０６／１５　１１：４１：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２４４　

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘The phone hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not bedeleted.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing the nameof each paired phone. When all

phones paired to the system havebeen read, the HFL response is‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFL response is,‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Batterystrength is three bars. Signalstrength is five bars, and thephone is roaming. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Searchingfor the next phone.’’ The HFLthen disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone. If the HFL finds it, anexample of the HFL response is,‘‘Paul’s phone is linked.’’ If noother phones are found, the firstphone remains linked.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing todelete Eric’s phone. Say OK tocontinue, otherwise, say Go back,or Cancel.’’

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

4.

5.

To list all paired phones, do this:

To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:


240

０７／０６／１５　１１：４１：１７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２４５　

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,the HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch. Continuinga call without running the enginemay discharge and weaken thevehicle’s battery.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

You can also make a call directlyfrom the list shown on thenavigation display.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob, or thesteering wheel volume controls.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

1.

2.

4.

3.

CONTINUED

To make a call using a phone number,do this:

Making a Call


Features

241

０７／０６／１５　１１：４１：２４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２４６　

＃

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:

To send a number during a call, do this:

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

The HFL allows you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can alsoprogram account numbers into theHFL phonebook for easy retrievalduring menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue toadd numbers.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob, or thesteering wheel volume controls.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob, or the steeringwheel volume controls.

To send a pound ( ), say‘‘pound.’’ To send a star (*), say ‘‘star.’’

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

4. Sending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call


242

NOTE:

０７／０６／１５　１１：４１：３２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２４７　

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like tosend account number?’’

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe Talk button and begin speaking.If you don’t want to answer the call,press the Back button.

If your phone has Call Waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press and release theTalk button to answer it. When youdo this, the original call is placed onhold. To return to the original call,press the Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the new call,disregard it, and continue with youroriginal call. If you want to hang upthe original call and answer the newcall, press the Back button.

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFL to your phone, or fromyour phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches from the HFL to thephone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’ Theaudio switches from your phone tothe HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The dialtones will be sent, and the call willcontinue.

2.

1.

3.

3.

To send a name during a call, do this: To transfer a call from the HFL to yourphone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFL, do this:

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call


Features

243

０７／０６／１５　１１：４１：４２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２４８　

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute iscanceled.’’

The HFL phonebook can store up to50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any types ofnumbers. For example, you can storea phone number and use it to make acall, or you can store an accountnumber and use it during a call to amenu-driven phone system.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete,receive contact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to store?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenumber for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is thenumber for account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFL response is ‘‘123 4567891. Say enter, or continue to addnumbers.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Eric (or accountnumber) has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’

1.

2.

4.

5.

3.

1.

2.

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:

Muting a Call Setting up the Phonebook


244

０７／０６／１５　１１：４１：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２４９　

To edit the number of a name, do this:

To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘What is the new number forEric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The number hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘The name hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘987 654 3219. Say enter, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to delete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, receivecontact, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook in theorder which they were stored.When the end of the list isreached, the HFL response is,‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

2.

1.

3.

4.

2.

1.

2.

3.

1.

4.5.

CONTINUED


Features

245

０７／０６／１５　１１：４２：０２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２５０　

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:


To store a phone number from yourphone:


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. When itsays the name you want to call, forexample, Eric, press the Talkbutton, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Would you liketo call Eric?’’

You can store the desired number tothe HFL phonebook directly fromyour cellular phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob, or the steeringwheel volume controls.

NOTE: Your phone may not havethis capability. Visit

, or call the Hands FreeLink consumer support at (888)528-7876, in Canada, call (888) 9-HONDA-9. You can see your phone’sowner’s manual for information.

With your phone on and theignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘Phonebook options are store,edit, delete, receive contact andlist.’’

2.

1.

3.

1.


Storing a Phone Number Directlyfrom Your Phone

246

０７／０６／１５　１１：４２：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２５１　

CONTINUED

If you want to continue to storeany other numbers, press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘HFL is now waitingto receive a contact from aBluetooth device.’’

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and transmit/send (individual steps will vary foreach type of phone, refer to yourphone’s owner’s manual) viaBluetooth. The HFL response is‘‘One phone number has beenreceived for this contact. Whatname would you like to store forthe mobile number? To discardthis number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or‘‘No.’’ If you say ‘‘Yes,’’ the HFLresponse is, ‘‘Neil at work hasbeen stored. Would you like HFLto receive another contact?’’ Go tostep 6.

If you say ‘‘No,’’ the HFL responseis ‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Neil at work.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Neil at work will bestored. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Receivecontact.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘The receive process requiresoperation of your Bluetooth device.For safety, only perform thisfunction while the vehicle isstopped. HFL is now waiting toreceive a contact from a Bluetoothdevice.’’

Select a desired number from thelist on your phone, and transmit/send (individual steps will vary foreach type of phone, refer to yourphone’s owner’s manual) viaBluetooth. The HFL response is‘‘One phone number has beenreceived for this contact. Whatname would you like to store forthe mobile number? To discardthis number, say ‘Discard.’ ’’

5.

4. 6.

7.

2.

3.


Features

247

０７／０６／１５　１１：４２：１５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２５２　

To use the cellular phonebook withthe HFL, say or select ‘‘CellularPhonebook’’ from the Informationscreen. The navigation display willchange as shown above.

If any phonebook is not stored andyour phone is not linked to the HFL,Cellular Phonebook is grayed out.

The cellular phonebook optionallows you to store up to 1,000 namesand 10,000 phone numbers in thephonebook of BluetoothHandsFreeLink from your cellularphonebook. The maximum namesand numbers to be stored varies onthe data size. With the HFL, you canthen automatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Susan at work.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Susan at work will bestored. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say either ‘‘Yes’’ or‘‘No.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘Susanat work has been stored. Wouldyou like HFL to receive anothercontact?’’

If you do not want to continue tostore any other numbers, pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘No.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Returning to the mainmenu.’’

NOTE: Your phone may not havethis capability. Visit

, or call the Hands FreeLink consumer support at (888)528-7876, in Canada, call (888) 9-HONDA-9. You can see your phone’sowner’s manual for information.

8.

9.

10.handsfreelink.

honda.com


Cellular Phonebook Options

248

０７／０６／１５　１１：４２：２３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２５３　

CONTINUED

To import the cellular phonebookYou can import the phonebook ofyour cellular phone in the HFL. Linkyour phone to the HFL and select‘‘Import Cellular Phonebook’’ fromthe ‘‘Select an option’’ screen. Whenthe message ‘‘The import wassuccessful.’’ is displayed, push in onthe Interface Dial to select ‘‘OK.’’

Search Imported Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to search thephone numbers stored in the HFL.When you enter keyword for aperson’s name, such as the firstname or last name, the system willfind the number you want and letyou make calls.

Delete Imported Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to delete the storedphonebook from the HFL. When youlink your phone to the HFL andselect this option, the system willautomatically delete the phonebookof the linked phone from the HFL(see page ).

PIN Number. This option allows youto add, change, or remove a PINnumber for any phonebook that hasbeen imported.

Import Cellular Phonebook: Thisoption allows you to store thephonebook of your cellular phone inthe HFL. When you link your phoneto the HFL and select this option, thesystem will start importing andloading the phonebook.

252


Features

249

Example

０７／０６／１５　１１：４２：３１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２５４　

Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe 4-digit PIN number to access thephonebook. The following screenwill appear.

Enter the PIN number to access thephonebook. You cannot access a PINprotected phonebook if you do notuse the correct PIN number.

You can search the stored numberby entering keywords to make callsby using the HFL.

Select ‘‘Search Imported Phonebook’’from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.The display will change as shownabove.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.

For information on linking to theHFL, see page .238

To search the imported phonebook


250

NOTE:

PIN ICON

IMPORTED DATEIMPORTEDPHONEBOOK

０７／０６／１５　１１：４２：４０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２５５　

－

CONTINUED

Select the number (1 6) of thedesired person from the list.

Up to three category icons aredisplayed in the right side of the list.These category icons indicate howmany numbers are stored for theperson. If a name has more thanthree category icons, ‘‘ ’’ isdisplayed.

The following category icons willappear:

Enter the keyword for a person’sname, such as the first name or lastname, using the Interface Dial. If thesystem does not find an exact match,say or select ‘‘LIST’’ when you finishentering the keyword.

The system will display a list ofperson’s names, with the closestmatch to the name you entered atthe top of the list.

…


Features

251

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Voice

Preference

Other

０７／０６／１５　１１：４２：５１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２５６　

To delete the imported phonebookTo store in the BluetoothHandsFreeLink

You can delete the storedphonebook from the HFL.Link your phone to the HFL andselect ‘‘Delete Imported Phonebook’’from the ‘‘Select an option’’ screen.The display will change as shownabove.

After selecting a person, the systemwill display a list of the person’sphone numbers.

Select the desired number from thelist to make a call.

Select the desired number from thelist to store it in the HFL.

Say or select ‘‘STORE INHandsFreeLink’’ from the ‘‘Select anumber to call’’ screen. The screenshown above will appear.


252

０７／０６／１５　１１：４３：００　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２５７　

CONTINUED

To add, change, or remove a PINnumber from any phonebook

You can add, change or remove aPIN number from any phonebook.Select ‘‘PIN Number’’ from the‘‘Select an Option’’ screen. Thedisplay will change as shown above.

After you enter the correct PINnumber, or if the phonebook youselect is not PIN protected, thefollowing screen appears.

Say or select ‘‘Yes’’, and the message‘‘The imported phonebook has beendeleted.’’ will appear. Select ‘‘OK’’ tocomplete the deletion.

Select a phonebook from thedisplayed list. If the phonebook youselect has a PIN icon, you will needthe 4-digit PIN number to access thephonebook. The following screenwill appear.

Enter the PIN number to access thephonebook. You cannot access a PINprotected phonebook if you do notuse the correct PIN number.


Features

253

０７／０６／１５　１１：４３：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２５８　

To change a PIN numberTo add a PIN number

Select the phonebook that youwish to change the PIN numberfor. The display will change asshown above.

Enter the 4-digit PIN number. Youwill be asked to re-enter the PIN toverify.

Select the phonebook you wish toadd the PIN number to. Thephonebook you select cannotalready have a PIN icon. Thedisplay will change as shownabove.

2. 1.1.


254

０７／０６／１５　１１：４３：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２５９　

CONTINUED

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,all names in the HFL phonebook,and all imported phonebooks.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘This processwill clear all paired phones, clearall entries in the phonebook, clearthe passcode, and restore thedefaults in the system setup. Isthis what you would like to do?’’

Enter your new 4-digit PINnumber. You will be asked to re-enter the PIN to verify.

Enter your current PIN number. 3.

1.

2.2.

To clear the system, do this:


Clearing the SystemF

eatures

255

０７／０６／１５　１１：４３：２４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２６０　

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Oui’’ or ‘‘Yes.’’If there are no paired phoneswithout French name tags, theHFL response is ‘‘Venillezattendre que le systeme change delangue. Please wait while thelanguage is changed.’’ ‘‘La languea ete changee. Retour au menuprincipal.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Pour que le systèmeidentifie les téléphones qui ont étéjumelés dans une autre langue, lesnoms des téléphones doivent être ré-enregistrés.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’ The HFL response is‘‘English or French?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘French.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Vous avezselectionne Français. Les nomsenregistres en mode Anglais neseront pas accessible en modeFrançais. Voulez-vous continuer?You have selected French. Nametags that were stored while inEnglish mode will not beaccessible in French mode. Wouldyou like to continue? ’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing toclear all paired phones, allphonebook entries, the passcode,and restore the defaults in thesystem setup. Say OK to proceed,otherwise say go back or cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘OK’’ toproceed, or say ‘‘Go back’’ or‘‘Cancel.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFL responseis, ‘‘Please wait until the system iscleared.’’ This may take up toabout 2 minutes to complete, thenthe HFL response is, ‘‘The systemhas been cleared. Returning to themain menu.’’

1.

2.

3.

5.

3.

4.

Canadian models onlyTo change from English to French, dothis:

Changing Language


256

NOTE:

０７／０６／１５　１１：４３：３２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２６１　

＜＞

＜＞

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes’’ or ‘‘Oui.’’If there are no paired phoneswithout English name tags, theHFL response is ‘‘Please waitwhile the language is changed.Venillez attendre que le systemechange de langue.’’ ‘‘The languagehas been changed. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout English name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

If there are paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language hasbeen changed. For the system toidentify phones that were pairedwhile in another language, thephone names need to be re-recorded.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘ChangerLangue.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Anglais ou Français?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Anglais.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘You haveselected English. Name tags thatwere stored while in French modewill not be accessible in Englishmode. Would you like to continue?Vous avez selectionne Anglais. Lesnoms enregistres en modeFrançais ne seront pas accessibleen mode Anglais. Voulez-vouscontnuez?’’

The HFL response is, for example,‘‘Quel est le nom Français pour

Paul’s phone ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est lenom Français pour Pat’sphone ?’’ Press and release theTalk button. Say ‘‘Téléphone dePat.’’ After all paired phonesmissing a French name tag are re-recorded, the HFL will prompt,‘‘Retour au menu principal.’’

4.

1.

2.

3.To change from French to English, dothis:


Features

257

NOTE:

０７／０６／１５　１１：４３：３８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２６２　

＜＞

＜＞




The HFL says, for example, ‘‘Whatis the English name for

Téléphone de Paul ?’’ Pressand release the Talk button. Afterthe beep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What is theEnglish name for Téléphone dePat ?’’ Press and release the Talkbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’sphone.’’ After all paired phonesmissing an English name tag arere-recorded, the HFL will say‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

4.


258

０７／０６／１５　１１：４３：４４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２６３　

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 260.................Fuel Recommendation . 260

.........Service Station Procedures . 261....................................Refueling . 261

........Check Fuel Cap Message . 262Opening and Closing

................................the Hood . 264...................................Oil Check . 266

.............Engine Coolant Check . 267...............................Fuel Economy . 268

...Accessories and Modifications . 271.............................Carrying Cargo . 273

Before Driving

Before

Driving

259

０７／０６／１５　１１：４３：４８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２６４　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy, metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour dealer for service.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

On models with manual transmission

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

260

０７／０６／１５　１１：４３：５８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２６５　

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 % ethanol byvolume and up to 15 % MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

To open the fuel fill door, pushdown on the lever located to theleft of the driver’s seat.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Quick Start Guide

Refueling

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures

Before

Driving

261

Push

FUEL FILL CAP

TETHER

HOLDER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０７／０６／１５　１１：４４：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２６６　

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Place thecap in the holder on the fuel filldoor.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,you will see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay. If the system still detectsan evaporative system leak afterretightening the cap, themalfunction indicator lamp maycome on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

3.

4.

5.

6.

370

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Check Fuel Cap Message

Service Station Procedures

262

０７／０６／１５　１１：４４：１５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２６７　

Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the select/reset knob.

The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messagewill appear each time you restart theengine until the system turns themessage off.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .370


Before

Driving

263

０７／０６／１５　１１：４４：１９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２６８　

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Reach in between the hood andthe front grille with your fingers.The hood latch handle is abovethe ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle upuntil it releases the hood. Lift thehood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

1. 2.

Opening and Closing the Hood


264

LATCHHOOD RELEASE HANDLE

０７／０６／１５　１１：４４：２５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２６９　

Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole pointedby an arrow in the hood.

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

To close the hood, lower it toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then press down firmlywith your hands. Make sure thehood is securely latched.

3. V6 models2.4 engine models


Before

Driving

265

V6 models

SUPPORT RODGRIP

2.4 engine modelsCLIP

０７／０６／１５　１１：４４：３２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２７０　

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.Remove the dipstick (orange

handle/loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

1.

2.

3.

4.

316

Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil


266

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK(orange handle)

DIPSTICK(orange loop)V6 models2.4 engine models 2.4 engine models

０７／０６／１５　１１：４４：４１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２７１　

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

320

312

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks


Before

Driving

267

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK MIN

MAX

MAX RESERVE TANK

MINV6 models V6 models

RESERVETANK

2.4 engine models

０７／０６／１５　１１：４４：４８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２７２　

－

－－

－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Fuel Economy

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

268

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

０７／０６／１５　１１：４４：５７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２７３　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel mileage at speeds above 45mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon.

An under-inflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

312CONTINUED

Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

317

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive EfficientlyB

eforeD

riving

269

０７／０６／１５　１１：４５：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２７４　

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

1)2)3)4)

Fuel Economy

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

270

Miles drivenGallons of

fuelMiles per

Gallon

100 Kilometers L per 100 kmLiter

０７／０６／１５　１１：４５：１８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２７５　

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

372

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

271

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０７／０６／１５　１１：４５：２７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２７６　

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withaftermarket components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Here are some examples:Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents, and are notcompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

272

０７／０６／１５　１１：４５：３４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２７７　

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Door and seat-back pockets

Roof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Center pockets

Console compartment

Trunk, including the rear seatwhen folded down

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

273

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS

CENTER POCKETSDOOR POCKETS

GLOVE BOX

０７／０６／１５　１１：４５：４２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２７８　

－

－ ×

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg).

Label Example

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

274

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０７／０６／１５　１１：４５：５３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２７９　

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

275

Max Load (850 lbs) Cargo Weight(550 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Cargo Weight(250 lbs)

Cargo Weight(100 lbs)

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)



０７／０６／１５　１７：４４：５７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２８０　

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of thetrunk panel. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, the proper operation of theseats, or the proper operation ofthe sensors under the seats.

Also, keep all cargo below thebottom of the windows. If it ishigher, it could interfere with theproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

51

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

carbon monoxidepoisoning

276

０７／０６／１５　１１：４６：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２８１　

OptionalThe cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your dealerfor further information.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

Carrying Cargo

Cargo NetB

eforeD

riving

277

０７／０６／１５　１１：４６：１２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２８２　

278

０７／０６／１５　１１：４６：１４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２８３　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 280.......................Starting the Engine . 281

...................Manual Transmission . 282..............Automatic Transmission . 284

...........................................Parking . 289.............................Braking System . 290

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 291Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 293Tire Pressure Monitoring

........................System (TPMS) . 295...........................Towing a Trailer . 298

Driving

Driving

279

０７／０６／１５　１１：４６：１８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２８４　

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

10.

92

93

75

14

55

101

On vehicles with power adjustableseats

On vehicles with manual adjustableseats

Preparing to Drive

280

０７／０６／１５　１１：４６：２９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２８５　

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Press the clutch pedal down all theway. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Starting the Engine

Driving

281

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .77

０７／０６／１５　１１：４６：３８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２８６　

On models with manual transmissionThe manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse.

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Whenyou are not shifting, do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal. This cancause your clutch to wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

Manual Transmission

282

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

０７／０６／１５　１１：４６：４５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２８７　

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (25 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (65 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Manual Transmission

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed LimiterD

riving

283

０７／０６／１５　１１：４６：５１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２８８　

These indicators between thetachometer and speedometer showwhich position the shift lever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal, andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then move thelever. You cannot shift out of Parkwhen the ignition switch is in theLOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission

284

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

０７／０６／１５　１１：４６：５８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２８９　

－－

－

CONTINUED

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and press the release buttonon the front of the shift lever to shiftfrom Park to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

287

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD3 to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to D3D3 to DD to ND to D3N to DR to N


Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Driving

285

０７／０６／１５　１１：４７：０５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２９０　

－－

－

－To shift to second,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:

For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use D3when towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D3 can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

To shift from second tofirst, press the release button on thefront of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D3, and D, you canoperate this transmission much likea manual transmission without aclutch pedal.


Second (2)Drive (D)

Drive (D3)

First (1)

286

０７／０６／１５　１１：４７：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２９１　

CONTINUED

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover. Use a smallflat-tipped screwdriver or metalfingernail file to carefully pry upthe edge of the cover and removeit from the slot.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed LimiterD

riving

287

COVER

０７／０６／１５　１１：４７：２０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２９２　

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the right side. Pressthe brake pedal, and restart theengine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on thefront of the shift lever and movethe shift lever out of Park toneutral.

6.

5.


288

RELEASE BUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

０７／０６／１５　１１：４７：２５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２９３　

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Except LX

Parking Tips

Parking

Driving

289

０７／０６／１５　１１：４７：３４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２９４　

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The emergencybrake assist system increases thestopping force when you depress thebrake pedal hard in an emergencysituation. The anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps you retain steeringcontrol when braking very hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectivenessand reduces brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

The front and rear disc brakes on allmodels have audible brake pad wearindicators.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System

290

０７／０６／１５　１１：４７：４０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２９５　

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage .371

CONTINUED

You should never pump the brake pedal.

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

291

０７／０６／１５　１１：４７：４８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２９６　

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

371

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Important Safety Reminders

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

292

０７／０６／１５　１１：４７：５５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２９７　

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA off switch again.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

294

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving

293

０７／０６／１５　１１：４８：０４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２９８　

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

This switch is under the driver’s sidevent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.

348

VSA and Tire SizesVSA Off Switch

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

294

VSA OFF SWITCH

０７／０６／１５　１１：４８：１２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０２９９　

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low while driving, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

356

CONTINUED

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Driving

295

０７／０６／１５　１１：４８：２０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３００　

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tire

information label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA off switch again.

344

343

294

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator


296

０７／０６／１５　１８：０５：２７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３０１　




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted insidethe tire behind the valve stem. Youmust use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

356

Changing a Tire with TPMS


Driving

297

０７／０６／１５　１１：４８：３５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３０２　

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavycan seriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Avoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)(see page ).260

Towing a Trailer

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight:

Break-In Period

298

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０７／０６／１５　１１：４８：４１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３０３　

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load is:

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60% of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and40% toward the rear, then re-adjustthe load as needed.

The weight that thetongue of a fully-loaded trailer putson the hitch should be approximately10% of the total trailer weight. Toomuch tongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

CONTINUED

EX and EX-L:

V6 models:

EX and EX-L:

V6 models:

LX and LX-P:

LX and LX-P:

Towing a Trailer

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Tongue Load:U.S. models

Canadian modelsD

riving

299

4,575 lbs (2,075 kg)

4,431 lbs (2,010 kg)

4,299 lbs (1,950 kg)

1,970 kg

2,030 kg

2,090 kg

０７／０６／１５　１１：４８：４８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３０４　

The best way to confirm that allloads are within limits is to checkthem at a public scale. For publicscales in your area, check your localphone book, or contact your trailerdealer or rental agency forassistance.

If you cannot get to a public scale,you can estimate the total trailerweight by adding the weight of yourtrailer (as quoted by themanufacturer) with everything in oron the trailer.

If you normally pull the same loadeach time you tow a trailer, you canuse a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge to check thetongue load the first time you set upa towing combination (a fully loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The maximum allowable weight atthe vehicle axles is:

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

EX and EX-L:

V6 models:

EX and EX-L:

V6 models:

LX and LX-P:

LX and LX-P:

Towing a Trailer

Checking LoadsGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Canadian models

U.S. models

300

2,017 lbs (915 kg)

2,337 lbs (1,060 kg)

2,403 lbs (1,090 kg)

2,061 lbs (935 kg)

2,557 lbs (1,160 kg)

2,061 lbs (935 kg)

1,065 kg

920 kg

1,095 kg

950 kg

1,175 kg

950 kg

０７／０６／１５　１１：４８：５８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３０５　

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Honda requires that any trailer witha total weight of 1,000 lbs (450 kg) ormore be equipped with its ownelectric or surge-type brakes.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and maintained, and that itmeets federal, state, province, andlocal regulations.

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Trailer BrakesHitches

Safety Chains

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Driving

301

０７／０６／１５　１１：４９：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３０６　

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the suspension andthe cooling system are in goodoperating condition.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check withyour local trailer sales or rentalagencies for the requirements in thearea where you plan to tow, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Towing a Trailer

Pre-Tow ChecklistAdditional Towing EquipmentTrailer Lights

302

０７／０６／１５　１１：４９：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３０７　

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D3.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use D position whentowing a trailer on level roads. D3 isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See ‘‘ ’’ in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.) CONTINUED

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer

Driving Safely With a TrailerD

riving

303

０７／０６／１５　１１：４９：２５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３０８　

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steering wheel,then turn the wheel to the left to getthe trailer to move to the left. Turnthe wheel to the right to move thetrailer to the right.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

Your vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page .

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

379bottom

Backing Up

Parking

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Towing Your Vehicle

Towing a Trailer

304

０７／０６／１５　１１：４９：３３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３０９　

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 306....................Maintenance Minder . 307

..............................Fluid Locations . 314........................Adding Engine Oil . 316

Changing the Engine Oil and...........................................Filter . 318

..............................Engine Coolant . 320....................Windshield Washers . 322

.......................Transmission Fluid . 323..........Automatic Transmission . 323

..............Manual Transmission . 325................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 326

................................Brake Fluid . 326...............................Clutch Fluid . 327

....................Power Steering Fluid . 327....................................Timing Belt . 328

.............................................Lights . 329................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 338

.....................................Floor Mats . 338..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 339

.................................Wiper Blades . 340...............................................Tires . 343

...................Checking the Battery . 351.............................Vehicle Storage . 352

403

Maintenance

Maintenance

305

０７／０６／１５　１１：４９：３８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３１０　

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate theengine.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

Maintenance Safety


Injury from moving parts.

Burns from hot parts.

Carbon Monoxide poisonfrom engine exhaust.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

306

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

０７／０６／１５　１１：４９：４７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３１１　

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)

100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealer doengine oil replacement and indicatedmaintenance service.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, then press and releasethe select/reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life indicatorappears (see page ).

Based on the engine operatingconditions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

64

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life DisplayM

aintenance

307

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

SELECT/RESET KNOB

０７／０６／１５　１１：４９：５５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３１２　

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicators remind you that yourvehicle will soon be due forscheduled maintenance.

Maintenance Minder

308

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

０７／０６／１５　１１：５０：０２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３１３　

CONTINUED

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative mileage isdisplayed and begins to blink afterthe vehicle has been driven 10 miles(10 km) or more.

Negative mileage means yourvehicle has passed the maintenancerequired point.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

You can switch the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer or the tripmeter. Press and release the select/reset knob on the instrument panel.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

313

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

309

NEGATIVE MILEAGE

０７／０６／１５　１１：５０：１２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３１４　

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:


Press the select/reset knobrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeindicator is displayed.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

To change the information displayfrom the engine oil life display to theodometer or the trip meter, pressand release the select/reset knob.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described on thefollowing.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

1.

2.313

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

310

MAINTENANCEMINDER INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

０７／０６／１５　１１：５０：２２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３１５　

CONTINUED

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Press the select/reset knob forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

Press the select/reset knob foranother 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

4.3.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

311

０７／０６／１５　１１：５０：２９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３１６　

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

323

326

343

329

266

267

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

312

０７／０６／１５　１１：５０：３９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３１７　

＊

＊

＃

＃

－－＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

313

Maintenance Main Items

Replace engine oil

Replace engine oil and oil filter

Inspect front and rear brakes

Check parking brake adjustment

Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

Suspension components

Driveshaft boots

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)

All fluid levels and condition of fluids

Exhaust system

Fuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub Items

Rotate tires

Replace air cleaner element

Replace dust and pollen filter

Inspect drive belt

Replace transmission fluid

Replace spark plugs

Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

(V6 engine only)

Inspect valve clearance

Replace engine coolant

:

A

B

Symbol

1

2

3

4

5

Symbol1

1

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after thedisplay is reset, change the engine oil every year.

Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the centercolumn on page .

NOTE:

1 :

312

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry and fromdiesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles(24,000 km).

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under 20°F,

29°C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/100,000 km(Canada).

Main

tenance

Min

der

０７／０６／１５　１１：５０：４７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３１８　

Fluid Locations

2.4 engine models

314

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

０７／０６／１５　１１：５０：５１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３１９　

Fluid Locations

V6 modelsM

aintenance

315

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

RADIATOR CAP

０７／０６／１５　１１：５０：５５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３２０　

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

316

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

V6 models

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

2.4 engine models

０７／０６／１５　１１：５１：０１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３２１　

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API certification seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

317

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

０７／０６／１５　１１：５１：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３２２　

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

3.2.

1.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

318

OIL DRAIN BOLTV6 models

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

2.4 engine models

０７／０６／１５　１１：５１：１７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３２３　

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

V6 models

2.4 engine models

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

319

V6 models

OIL FILTER OIL FILTER

2.4 engine models

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５１：２７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３２４　

－－

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

2.4 engine models only

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

320

V6 modelsRESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK2.4 engine models

If you regularly drive your vehicleunder the severe conditions in very lowtemperature (under 31°F, 35°C), ahigher concentration of coolant shouldbe used. Consult your Honda dealerf or more inf ormation of the propercoolant.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５１：３４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３２５　

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing it down and turning itcounterclockwise.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

4.1.

2.

3.5.

6.

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

321

RADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR CAP

V6 models2.4 engine models

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５１：４４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３２６　

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal use.

Check the fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).62

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

322

LEVEL GAUGE

V6 models

LEVEL GAUGE

2.4 engine models

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５１：５１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３２７　

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

323

V6 models

DIPSTICK DIPSTICK

UPPERMARKLOWERMARK

2.4 engine models 2.4 engine models

０７／０６／１５　１１：５２：００　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３２８　

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid).

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the maintenance minder (see page

).

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

5.

4.6.

307

Transmission Fluid

324

V6 models

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Donot mix with other transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５２：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３２９　

To check the transmission fluid level,remove the 16 under cover holdingclips with a flat-tip screwdriver, thenremove the under cover carefully.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground.

Reinstall the under cover and put theholding clips back in place. Makesure the under cover is installedunder the edge of the front bumper.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the maintenance minder (see page

).

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Remove the transmission filler bolt,and carefully feel inside the bolt holewith your finger.

The fluid level should be up to theedge of the bolt hole. If it is not, addHonda Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thehole. Reinstall the filler bolt, andtighten it securely.

307

2.4 engine models

Transmission Fluid

Manual TransmissionM

aintenance

325

Correct level

FILLER BOLT

０７／０６／１５　１１：５２：１８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３３０　

Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. There are up totwo reservoirs, depending on themodel. They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

Replace the brake fluid according tothe maintenance minder (see page

).

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

307

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake Fluid

326

MAX

MIN

０７／０６／１５　１１：５２：２６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３３１　

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

Manual transmission onlyPower Steering FluidClutch Fluid

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

Maintenance

327

MAX

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVELMIN

2.4 engine models

０７／０６／１５　１１：５２：３３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３３２　

－－

The timing belt should be replacedaccording to the maintenanceminder (see page ).

Replace the timing belt every 60,000miles (U.S.) or every 100,000 km(Canada) if you regularly drive yourvehicle in any of the followingconditions:

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spills immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

If you frequently tow a trailer.

307

V6 modelsTiming Belt

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

328

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVELV6 models

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５２：４１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３３３　

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be done by your dealer orother qualified technician.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Open the hood.

To change a bulb on thepassenger’s side, remove theengine coolant reserve tank bypulling it out of its stay.

1.

CONTINUED

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

High Beam HeadlightM

aintenance

329

2.4 engine modelsSTAY

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５２：４９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３３４　

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab to unlock it, then slide theconnector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

To change a bulb on the driver’s side,undo the fastener and remove the airintake cover and duct.

3.

2.On V6 models

Lights

330

FASTENER AIR INTAKE COVER BULB

V6 models STAY V6 models TABDUCT

０７／０６／１５　１１：５２：５６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３３５　

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the engine coolantreserve tank.


Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Reinstall the air intake cover andduct securely. Reinstall thefastener and secure it by pushingon the head until it locks.

6.

5.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

7.

4.

CONTINUED

Passenger’s side

Driver’s side on V6 models

Low Beam Headlight

Lights

Maintenance

331

HOLDING CLIPSBULB

TAB

０７／０６／１５　１１：５３：０７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３３６　

Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach one in place by pushing onthe center.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Open the hood.

To change the turn signal bulb onthe passenger’s side, remove theengine coolant reserve tank bypulling it out of its stay.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

To remove the burned out bulb,push it in and turn itcounterclockwise until it unlocks.

1. 2.

8.

7.

6.

9.

3.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulb

332

BULBSTAYV6 model is shown.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５３：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３３７　

Install the new bulb and turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Reinstall the coolant reserve tank.

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

6.

1.

7.

5.

4.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Passenger’s side

Lights

Replacing a Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

Maintenance

333

HOLDING CLIPS BULB

０７／０６／１５　１１：５３：２６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３３８　

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.


Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clips,and lock them in place by pushingon their centers.

Open the trunk.

Remove the screw in the center ofthe fastener on the side of thetrunk lining. Pull the lining back.

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: stop/taillight,back-up light or turn signal light.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.

5.

6.

7.

2.

1.

4.

3.

5.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

334

SCREW

SOCKETBULB

０７／０６／１５　１１：５３：３６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３３９　


Push the trunk lid trim back intoposition.

Put the fastener into the hole onthe side of the trunk lining.Reinstall the screw.

Open the trunk, and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks. Make surethe new bulb is working.

2.

1.

3.6.

7.

8.

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Maintenance

335

BULB

SOCKET

０７／０６／１５　１１：５３：４４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３４０　

If equipped

Passenger’s side

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

The fog lights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustment shouldbe done by your dealer or otherqualified technician.

Remove the three fasteners with aflat-tip screwdriver.

Pull down the under cover fromthe bumper carefully.


Remove the bulb by turning itabout one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

1. 2.

3.

Replacing a Fog Light Bulb

Lights

336

ELECTRICALCONNECTOR TABFASTENERS

Halogen light bulbs get very hot whenlit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch onthe glass can cause the bulb to overheatand shatter.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５３：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３４１　

To change the bulb, start theengine, turn the steering wheel allthe way to the right, then turn offthe engine.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Reinstall the under cover and putthe three fasteners back in place.

Reinstall the inner fender. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the front bumper.

Reinstall the holding clips, andpush in its head of each clip.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb from the foglight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

6.

7.

8.

4.

5.

9.

10.

11. Passenger’s side

Driver’s side

Driver’s side

Lights

Maintenance

337

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

TAB

HOLDING CLIPS

０７／０６／１５　１１：５４：０３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３４２　

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Dirt build-up around the openings ofthe seat belt anchors can cause thebelts to retract slowly. Wipe theopenings with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchors. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats

338

OPENING

０７／０６／１５　１１：５４：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３４３　

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mat.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

Have your dealer replace this filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the airflowfrom the heating and coolingsystem/climate control systembecomes less than usual.

Make sure the rear floor mats areproperly positioned. If not, the floormat will prevent the seat operationand make the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

Dust and Pollen FilterM

aintenance

339

０７／０６／１５　１１：５４：１５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３４４　

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Put a cloth on the edge of the locktab, then push up on the lock tabcarefully with a flat-tip screwdriver.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

340

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５４：２２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３４５　

Pivot the blade assembly towardthe wiper arm until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Make sure the three rubber tabsinside the blade fit to each notch ofthe reinforcement, as shown.

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

341

BLADE

BLADEREINFORCEMENT

WIPER ARM

TOP

０７／０６／１５　１１：５４：３０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３４６　

Place the top of the wiper blade onthe end of the blade assembly, andslide the blade onto the assemblyin the direction pointed to by thearrow.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Push downthe lock tab. Make sure the wiperblade assembly locks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Make sure the tab on the bladeassembly fits in the indent of thewiper blade and the blade iscompletely installed.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

342

INDENT

TAB

０７／０６／１５　１１：５４：３６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３４７　

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride harshly, are moreprone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on the next page.

295

CONTINUED

Inflation Guidelines

Tires

Maintenance

343

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５４：４６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３４８　

＊＊

＊

＊

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .388

Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire Size

Tire Size

Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

1 :2 :

EX, EX-L

Front/Rear:

LX, LX-P

V6 models

2.4 engine models

1

2

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tires

344

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )P225/50R17 93V32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

P215/60R16 94H

P225/50R17 93V32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

０７／０６／１５　１１：５４：５７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３４９　

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

We strongly recommend that you donot drive faster than the postedspeed limits and conditions allow. Ifyou ever drive in a sanctionedcompetitive event at sustained highspeeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),be sure to adjust the cold tirepressures as shown below. If you donot, excessive heat can build up andcause sudden tire failure.

Tire pressure for high speed drivingis the same as for normal driving.

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

V6 models only

V6 models only

2.4 engine models

Tire InspectionHigh Speed Driving

Tires

Maintenance

345

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

P225/50R17 93V 35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

０７／０６／１５　１１：５５：０８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３５０　

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).390

Tires

Tire MaintenanceTire Service Life

TireLabeling

346

０７／０６／１５　１１：５５：１５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３５１　

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display.Move the tires to the positionsshown in the illustration each timethey are rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

On vehicles with aluminum wheels Tire Rotation

Tires

Maintenance

347

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

FrontFront

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５５：２１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３５２　

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work on that tire.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of each wheel.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the system to activate.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

348

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５５：２８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３５３　

＋

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

Tires

EX and EX-L:

V6 models:

EX and EX-L:

V6 models:

Wheels

Cable-type:

Cable-type:

388

390

SCC Radial ChainCH2412T

SCC Radial ChainCH2612T

LX and LX-P:

LX and LX-P:

CONTINUED

EX, EX-L and V6 models

LX, LX-P

Wheel and Tire Specifications Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance

349

16 x 6 1/2 J

17 x 7 1/2 J

17 x 7 1/2 J

P215/60R16 94H

P225/50R17 93V

P225/50R17 93V

０７／０６／１５　１１：５５：４０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３５４　

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

If equipped

Wheels

Tires

350

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５５：４７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３５５　

－Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified mechanic.

The location of the test indicatorwindow varies betweenmanufacturers.

CONTINUED

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

351

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

V6 models

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

2.4 engine models

０７／０６／１５　１１：５５：５５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３５６　

Fill the fuel tank.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting may be lost. To reset the time,see page .

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem may disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio, you willsee ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page

).

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

214

213

On vehicles with navigation system

Except LX and LX-P

Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage

Vehicle Storage

352

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５６：０４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３５７　

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance

353

０７／０６／１５　１１：５６：１１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３５８　

354

０７／０６／１５　１１：５６：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３５９　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 356....................Changing a Flat Tire . 357

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 362................................Jump Starting . 364

..............If the Engine Overheats . 367.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 369..........Charging System Indicator . 369

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 370...............Brake System Indicator . 371

..............................................Fuses . 372..............................Fuse Locations . 376

......................Emergency Towing . 379

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

355

０７／０６／１５　１１：５６：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３６０　

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

The low tire pressure indicatorcomes on and stays on after youreplace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire. After severalmiles (kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the lowtire pressure indicator goes off.

Compact Spare Tire

356

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０７／０６／１５　１１：５６：２５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３６１　

CONTINUED

Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

The tools are in the trunk. Openthe trunk and raise the trunk floorby lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

357

TRUNK FLOOR

JACKSPARE TIRE

TOOL KIT

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５６：３３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３６２　

Take the jack out of the tool kitcase.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

6. 7. 8.


358

JACKING POINT

JACK WHEEL NUT

０７／０６／１５　１１：５６：３８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３６３　

CONTINUED

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

9.

10.

11.LX model


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

359

WHEEL WRENCH EXTENSION

WHEEL NUT

WHEEL COVER BRAKE HUB

０７／０６／１５　１１：５６：４６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３６４　

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap (ifequipped) before storing the flattire in the trunk well.

15.

12.

13.

14.


360

CENTER CAP

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

０７／０６／１５　１１：５６：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３６５　

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

To remove the spacer cone, squeezethe tabs on the wing bolt todisengage it from the center of thespacer cone, then pull the boltdownward.

To install the wing bolt to the spacercone, reverse this procedure.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack and tools in the toolkit case. Place the tool kit case inthe flat tire.

Your vehicle’s original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(seepage ).

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

16.

17.

19.

18.

20.

21.

22.

297


Changing a Tire with TPMS

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

361

WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

SPACER CONE

TAB

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５７：０３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３６６　

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified mechanic todetermine the problem (see

on page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery connections (see page

). You can then try jumpstarting the vehicle from a boosterbattery (see page ).

364

379

351

364

If the Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

362

０７／０６／１５　１１：５７：１１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３６７　

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

77

281

372

379

If the Engine Won’t Start

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

363

０７／０６／１５　１１：５７：１７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３６８　

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions. Open the hood, and check the

physical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

To jump start your vehicle:

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (Manual)or Park (Automatic), and set theparking brake.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

1.

2.

Jump Starting

364

2.4 engine models

BOOSTER BATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５７：２４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３６９　

＋

＋－

CONTINUED

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the engine mountingbolt (automatic) or thetransmission mounting bolt(manual), as shown. Do notconnect this jumper cable to anyother part of the engine.

3. 4. 2.4 engine models

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

365

V6 models BOOSTER BATTERY2.4 engine models with automatictransmission

2.4 engine models with manualtransmission

０７／０６／１５　１１：５７：３１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３７０　

－

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.Connect the second jumper cable to

the negative ( ) terminal on thebooster battery. Connect the otherend to the engine hanger as shown.Do not connect this jumper cable toany other part of the engine.

7.

6.

5.

V6 models

Jump Starting

366

V6 models

０７／０６／１５　１１：５７：３７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３７１　

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

379

CONTINUED

EmergencyTowing

If the Engine Overheats

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

367

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５７：４５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３７２　

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature to maximum heat(climate control to AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

7.

6. 8.

9.

10.

11.

379Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

368

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５７：５３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３７３　

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

266

316

379

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

369

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５８：０１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３７４　

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the malfunctionindicator lamp may also come onwith the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may go off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by a dealer as soon aspossible.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make sure

these codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until itclicks at least once. Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes may be erased. It cantake several days of driving undervarious conditions to set the codesagain.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).397

Readiness Codes Emissions Testing

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

370

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５８：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３７５　

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal. If you must drive the vehicle a short

distance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

The brake system indicator normallycomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, and asa reminder to check the parkingbrake. It will stay on if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

326

379Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

371

U.S. Canada

０７／０６／１５　１１：５８：１６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３７６　

The vehicle’s fuses are contained inthree fuse boxes.

The driver’s side interior fuse box isunder the dashboard on the driver’sside. The fuse label is attached onthe side panel.

The passenger’s side interior fusebox is on the lower right side panel.To remove the fuse box lid, put yourfinger in the notch on the lid, andpull it upward slightly, then pull ittoward you and take it out of itshinges.

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side. To open it, push thetabs as shown.

Fuses

372

UNDER-HOODINTERIOR (Driver’s side) INTERIOR (Passenger’s side)

FUSE BOX FUSE LABEL TAB

NOTCH

０７／０６／１５　１１：５８：２３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３７７　

Also check the combined fuse box inthe under-hood fuse box.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

, and , or the diagram onthe fuse box lid or the fuse label,which fuse or fuses control thatcomponent. Check those fuses first,but check all the fuses beforedeciding that a blown fuse is not thecause. Replace any blown fuses andcheck if the device works.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking at the wire inside.Removing these fuses requires aPhillips-head screwdriver.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

On the under-hood and passenger’sside interior fuse boxes, removethe cover from each fuse box.

3.1.

2.

376 377 378

CONTINUED

Fuses

Checking and Replacing FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

373

FUSE BLOWN BLOWN

０７／０６／１５　１１：５８：３１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３７８　

Your vehicle has spare fuses on theback of the under-hood fuse boxcover.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided on the back of theunder-hood fuse box cover.

5.4.

Fuses

374

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER SPARE FUSES

FUSE PULLER

０７／０６／１５　１１：５８：３８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３７９　

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system may disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio, youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code(see page ).

6.

213

Except LX and LX-P

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

375

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５８：４４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３８０　

－－

－

－－－－－

－－－－－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

－－

－－＊

＊

＊

＊

－－

－

－

－－－

－－

－

＊＊

Circuits Protected

No. Circuits Protected

No.Circuits Protected Amps.No. Amps.

Amps.

Not UsedNot UsedSub Fan MotorWiper MotorMain Fan MotorDriver’s Side Light MainDriver’s Side Fuse BoxPassenger’s Side Light Main

4556789

10111213141516171819192021

Driver’s Side Fuse BoxIG MainRear DefrosterSub Fan MotorNot UsedNot UsedNot UsedHeater MotorHazardHorn, StopNot UsedNot UsedIG CoilFI SubBack UpInterior LightsFI MainDBWNot UsedBack Up, FI ECUMG ClutchFan Relay

BatteryBatteryPassenger’s Side Fuse BoxNot UsedABS/VSAABS/VSA MotorPassenger’s Side Fuse BoxNot Used

30 A30 A30 A30 A

(60 A)30 A

100 A120 A

40 A

40 A30 A

(40 A)

(40 A)50 A40 A20 A

40 A15 A20 A

15 A15 A10 A

7.5 A15 A15 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

2.4 engine modelsV6 models

1 :2 :

3 73 8

2 6

3 23 33 43 53 6

1 22 12 22 32 42 5

1

2

1

2

3 13 1

1 11 1 1

2

1

2

Fuse Locations

376

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

０７／０６／１５　１１：５８：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３８１　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

－－

－

－

＊

No. Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedNo.

No. Circuits Protected

Amps. Amps.

Amps.

12345678

Not UsedNot UsedWasherWiperMeterABS/VSAACGSTS

Fuel PumpVB SOLSRSODS (Occupant DetectionSystem)Not UsedACMDaytime Running Lights

9101112

131415

161718192021222324252627

28293031

If equipped

A/CAccessory, Key, LockAccessoryDriver’s Power Seat SlidingMoonroofDriver’s Power Seat RecliningRear Left Power WindowFront Accessory Power SocketDriver’s Power WindowDriver’s Side Door LockLeft Front Fog LightLeft Side Small Lights(Exterior)Left Headlight High BeamTPMSLeft Headlight Low BeamNot Used

15 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A15 A7.5 A

20 A(10 A)10 A

7.5 A

(10 A)7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A(20 A)(20 A)(20 A)20 A15 A20 A10 A

(10 A)10 A

10 A7.5 A10 A

:

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

377

INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Driver’s Side)

０７／０６／１５　１１：５９：０１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３８２　

－

－－

－－－

－

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

No. No. Amps.

No.

Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedAmps.

Amps.12

345678

9

101112

13

1415

(20 A)

10 A(20 A)15 A

20 A

(20 A)

16171819202122

If equipped

Front Passenger’s PowerSeat SlidingRight Side Door LockRear Right Power WindowRear Accessory PowerSocketFront Passenger’s PowerWindowNot UsedPremium AMP

Right Headlight High BeamRight Side Small Lights(Exterior)Right Front Fog LightRight Headlight Low BeamNot UsedInterior LightsNot UsedFront Passenger’s PowerSeat Reclining

Not UsedNot UsedLumbar SupportSeat HeaterNot UsedNot UsedNot Used

(10 A)(15 A)

10 A10 A

(10 A)10 A

7.5 A

(20 A)

:

Fuse Locations

378

INTERIOR FUSE BOX (Passenger’s Side)

０７／０６／１５　１１：５９：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３８３　

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

With the front wheels on the ground,do not tow the vehicle more than 50miles (80 km), and keep the speedbelow 35 mph (55 km/h).

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the front tires and lift them offthe ground. The rear tires remain onthe ground.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Turn off the engine.Release the parking brake.

Shift to D position for 5 seconds,then to N.

Start the engine.Press on the brake pedal. Movethe shift lever through all itspositions.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

CONTINUED

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This is an acceptableway to tow your vehicle.

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

379

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

０７／０６／１８　２０：４２：５０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３８４　

Emergency Towing

380

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

０７／０６／１５　１１：５９：２５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３８５　

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 382Specifications

...............(2.4 engine models) . 384Specifications

...............................(V6 models) . 386DOT Tire Quality Grading

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 388.................................Tire Labeling . 390

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) Required Federal

............................Explanation . 392.......................Emissions Controls . 394

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 396........................Emissions Testing . 397

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

381

０７／０６／１５　１１：５９：２８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３８６　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

382

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

０７／０６／１５　１１：５９：３３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３８７　

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped onthe front of the engine block.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

383

ENGINE NUMBER

2.4 engine models

V6 models

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONNUMBER

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

０７／０６／１５　１１：５９：３８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３８８　

－－

＊

＊

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications (2.4 engine models)

384

Dimensions Seating Capacities

Capacities

Weights

Air Conditioning

Engine

110.2 in (2,800 mm)62.6 in (1,590 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

194.1 in (4,930 mm)72.7 in (1,847 mm)58.1 in (1,475 mm)

4.8 US qt (4.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

6.9 US qt (6.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )2.1 US qt (2.0 )2.0 US qt (1.9 )5.6 US qt (5.3 )4.2 US qt (4.0 )4.4 US qt (4.2 )

2.11 US gal (8.0 )2.14 US gal (8.1 )

1.56 US gal (5.9 )1.59 US gal (6.0 )

523

62.2 in (1,580 mm)

TotalFrontRear

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission fluidAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity: 0.180 US gal (0.68 )Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

HFC-134a (R-134a)14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)

ND-OIL8

Water cooled 4-strokeDOHC i-VTEC 4-cylinder

gasoline engine3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)

144 cu-in (2,354 cm )10.5 : 1

ILZKR7B11SSXU22HCR11S

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs (U.S.)

Spark plugs (Canada)SXU22HCR11SILZKR7B11SDILZKR7A11GS

18.5 US gal (70.0 )Approx.

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

1 :

2 :

NGK:DENSO:

ChangeIncluding filterWithout filter

TotalChangeTotalChangeTotal

U.S.Canada

Front/Rear

ULEVPZEV

1 : 2 : EX, EX-L

NGK:NGK:DENSO:

LX, LX-P1

2

1

2

０７／０６／１５　１１：５９：５７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３８９　

－

－－－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－－－－－

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications (2.4 engine models)

TechnicalInform

ation

385

Lights

Battery

Fuses

Tires

Alignment

12 V 60 W (HB3)12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 21/5 W

21 W12 V 21 W

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking lightsFront side marker lightsRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightsStop/taillightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightCeiling lightSpotlightsTrunk lightFront door courtesy lightsVanity mirror lights 12 V 1.1 W

12 V 2 CP12 V 5 W12 V 8 W12 V 8 W12 V 21 W12 V 5 W12 V 21/5 W

12 V 3 CP12 V

Capacity 12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

36 AH/5 HR38 AH/5 HR45 AH/20 HR47 AH/20 HR52 AH/5 HR65 AH/20 HR

Interior

Under-hood

Size

Pressure

P215/60R16 94HP225/50R17 93V

T135/80D16 101M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°48’

See page 377 or the fuse labelattached on the side panel.See page 378 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door.See page 376 or the fuse boxcover.

HighLow

: PZEV engine model

Passenger’s side

Driver’s side

Front/Rear

SpareFront/Rear

Spare

1 :2 :

FrontRearFrontRearFront

(Amber)

LX, LX-PEX, EX-L

2

1

2

1

０７／０６／１５　１２：００：２４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３９０　

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications (V6 models)

386

Dimensions Seating Capacities

Capacities

Weights

Air Conditioning

Engine

110.2 in (2,800 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

194.1 in (4,930 mm)72.7 in (1,847 mm)58.1 in (1,475 mm)

62.2 in (1,580 mm)

TotalFrontRear

523

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

1.74 US gal (6.6 )2.27 US gal (8.6 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )4.5 US qt (4.3 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )3.5 US qt (3.3 )7.9 US qt (7.5 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

0.180 US gal (0.68 )

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

HFC-134a (R-134a)14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)

ND-OIL8

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)212 cu-in (3,471 cm )

10.5 : 1ILZKR7B11SXU22HCR11DILZKR7A11G

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs (U.S.)

Spark plugs (Canada) ILZKR7B11SXU22HCR11

18.5 US gal (70.0 )

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC i-VTEC 6-cylinder (V6)

gasoline engine

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeIncluding filterWithout filter

TotalChangeTotal

U.S.Canada

ChangeTotal

ULEVPZEV

Front/Rear

NGK:DENSO:NGK:NGK:DENSO:

2

1

０７／０６／１５　１２：００：４３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３９１　

＊

－

－－－－－－－－－－－－－－

＊

－－

If equipped

Specifications (V6 models)

TechnicalInform

ation

387

Lights

Battery

Fuses

Tires

Alignment

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking lightsFront side marker lightsFog lightsRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsHigh-mount brake lightCeiling lightSpotlightsTrunk lightFront door courtesy lightsVanity mirror lights 1.1 W

12 V 2 CP12 V 5 W

8 W

12 V 60 W (HB3)12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 21/5 W

3 CP12 V12 V 55 W12 V 21 W12 V 21 W12 V 5 W12 V 21 W12 V 8 W12 V

12 V

Capacity 12 V12 V

72 AH/20 HR60 AH/5 HR

Interior

Under-hood

See page 377 or the fuse labelattached on the side panel.See page 378 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door.See page 376 or the fuse boxcover.

Size

Pressure

P225/50R17 93VT135/80D16 101M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°48’

HighLow

(Amber)

:

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

(HI1)

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

０７／０６／１５　１２：０１：０５　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３９２　

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

388

０７／０６／１５　１２：０１：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３９３　

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TechnicalInform

ation

389

０７／０６／１５　１２：０１：１７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３９４　

－

－

－

－

－－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

P

R

V

DOT

B97R

225

50

93

17

Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)

Tire Size

390

(3)

(4)

Tire Labeling Example

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)(3)(4)

(1) Tire SizeTire Identification Number (TIN)Maximum Tire PressureMaximum Tire Load

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

P225/50R17 93V

０７／０６／１５　１２：０１：３０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３９５　

－

－

－

－

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

WeekYear

FW6X

2202

Max Press

Max Load

Tire Labeling

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

TechnicalInform

ation

391

０７／０６／１５　１４：５３：２２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３９６　

－

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

392

０７／０６／１５　１２：０１：４４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３９７　

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

393

０７／０６／１５　１２：０１：４９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３９８　

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

394

０７／０６／１５　１２：０１：５７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０３９９　

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are

designed and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude three or four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing control, exhaustgas recirculation (V6 models), andthree way catalytic converter. Thesethree or four systems work togetherto control the engine’s combustionand minimize the amount of HC, CO,and NOx that come out the tailpipe.The exhaust emissions controlsystems are separate from thecrankcase and evaporative emissionscontrol systems.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

2

2

V6 models

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Ignition Timing Control System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

395

０７／０６／１５　１２：０２：０６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４００　

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

396

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

2.4 engine models V6 models

０７／０６／１５　１２：０２：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４０１　

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic) or neutral (manual).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

397

０７／０６／１５　１２：０２：２２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４０２　

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (automatic) or 5th (manual). Donot use the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing

398

０７／０６／１５　１２：０２：２７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４０３　

....Customer Service Information . 400....................Warranty Coverages . 401

Reporting Safety Defects............................(U.S. Vehicle) . 402

.....................Authorized Manuals . 403

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

399

０７／０６／１５　１２：０２：３０　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４０４　

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, and tele-phone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

382

Customer Service Information

400

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

０７／０６／１５　１４：５４：４４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４０５　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2008 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2008 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

401

０７／０６／１５　１２：０２：４８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４０６　

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

; or write to:

.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

402

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０７／０６／１５　１２：０２：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４０７　

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New

DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from

Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington,

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

(U.S. only)A

uthorizedM

anuals

403

Form Description

2008 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4

Service Manual Base Book

2008 Honda Accord 2/4 door V6

Service Manual Supplement

2008 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2008 Honda 2/4 door Body Repair Manual

2008 Honda Accord 4-door Owner’s Manual

2008 Honda Accord

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2008 Honda Accord Honda Service History

2008 Honda Accord 4-door Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61TA000

61TA001

61TA000EL

61TA030

31TA5600

31TA5800

31TA5M00

31TA5Q00

HON-R

www. helminc. com

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：０１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４０８　

404

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：０３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４０９　

CONTINUED

...................Capacities Chart . 384, 386.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51

.............................Carrying Cargo . 273.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

....................................Accessories . 271ACCESSORY

...............(Ignition Key Position) . 78............Accessory Power Sockets . 111

..................Active Head Restraints . 96....................Additives, Engine Oil . 317

...........................Advanced Airbags . 25...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21

..........Airbag System Components . 21......Air Conditioning System . 120, 125

.................................Usage . 123, 126.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 343

......................................Antifreeze . 320Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 58, 291...................................Operation . 291

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 213.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 78

................................Audio System . 133.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 80...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19

.............Automatic Speed Control . 223..............Automatic Transmission . 284

..................Capacity, Fluid . 384, 386

.......................................Shifting . 284Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 284................Shift Lever Positions . 284

....................Shift Lock Release . 287......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 212

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 56, 369............................Jump Starting . 364

..............................Maintenance . 351....................Specifications . 385, 387

..............................Before Driving . 259....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 18

.........................Beverage Holders . 111.......Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 231

..................................Booster Seats . 48Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 291.............Break-in, New Linings . 260

....................Bulb Replacement . 334...........................................Fluid . 326

.......................................Parking . 109

.................System Indicator . 57, 371........................Wear Indicators . 290

.............................Braking System . 290.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 260

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 72........................Brights, Headlights . 69

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 334

..............................Brake Lights . 334.................................Fog Lights . 336

................Front Parking Lights . 332.................................Headlights . 329

.........High-mount Brake Light . 335................................Rear Lights . 334

....................Specifications . 385, 387............Turn Signal Lights . 332, 334

......................Bulbs, Halogen . 329, 336

Index

A

B

C

IND

EX

I

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：０９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４１０　

＊

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 54

..........Daytime Running Lights . 61, 71Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 61.................................Dead Battery . 364

.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 402................Defogger, Rear Window . 74......Defrosting the Windows . 124, 129

............................Dimensions . 384, 386...............Dimming the Headlights . 69

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 323

..................................Engine Oil . 266..........................Directional Signals . 69

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 290.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 319

Doors..........................Auto Door Lock . 80

.......................Auto Door Unlock . 83..............Childproof Door Locks . 86..............Locking and Unlocking . 79..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 388

.........................................CD Care . 206..........................CD Changer . 163, 194

.......................................CD Player . 141........................Certification Label . 382

............................................Chains . 349....................Changing a Flat Tire . 357

Changing Oil........................................How to . 318......................................When to . 307

...Charging System Indicator . 56, 369............Check Fuel Cap Message . 262............Checklist, Before Driving . 280

.....................................Child Safety . 33..............................Booster Seats . 48

.............................Child Seats . 40, 41Important Safety

..........................Reminders . 30-50..........................................Infants . 38

..........................Larger Children . 47.........................................LATCH . 42

......................Risks with Airbags . 34.............................Small Children . 39

..........................................Tether . 46...........................Warning Labels . 52

..........Where Should a Child Sit . 34

.......................................Child Seats . 33.........................................LATCH . 42

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46..................Childproof Door Locks . 86................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 338...............Climate Control System . 125

..............................................Clock . 214...................................Clutch Fluid . 327

..................CO in the Exhaust . 51, 396............Cold Weather, Starting in . 281

..............................Compact Spare . 356.........................................Compass . 219

.................Console Compartment . 112

.................Consumer Information . 400.............Controls, Instruments and . 53

Coolant........................................Adding . 320

....................................Checking . 267.........................Proper Solution . 320

...................Temperature Gauge . 66Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 394................Cruise Control Indicator . 62............Cruise Control Operation . 223.............Customer Service Office . 400

Index

D

II

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４１１　

CONTINUED

Downshifting, Manual.............................Transmission . 282

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 279

....................................Economy . 268..........Dual Temperature Control . 130

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 339

..............................Economy, Fuel . 268..................................Emergencies . 355

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 364...........Brake System Indicator . 371

................Changing a Flat Tire . 357.....Charging System Indicator . 369

.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 73............................Jump Starting . 364

..................Checking the Fuses . 372.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 369...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 370

..................Overheated Engine . 367.......................................Towing . 379

.........................Emergency Brake . 109......................Emergency Flashers . 73

......................Emergency Towing . 379

.......................Emissions Controls . 394........................Emissions Testing . 397

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 320

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 66.........................If It Won’t Start . 362

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 370.......................Oil Life Indicator . 307

..............Oil Pressure Indicator . 369

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 316...............................Overheating . 367

....................Specifications . 384, 386

....................Speed Limiter . 283, 287.......................................Starting . 281

..........Engine Speed Limiter . 283, 287......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 261

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 394...............................Exhaust Fumes . 51

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 16

..........................Fan, Interior . 121, 128.........................................Features . 119

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 261

Filters........................Dust and Pollen . 339

...............................................Oil . 318.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 73

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 357Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 324..........................................Brake . 326.........................................Clutch . 327

..............Manual Transmission . 325..........................Power Steering . 327

..................Windshield Washer . 322........................................Fog Lights . 72

...........................Folding Rear Seat . 97..........................Four-way Flashers . 73

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 23.................................................Fuel . 260

........Check Fuel Cap Message . 262......................Fill Door and Cap . 261

...........................................Gauge . 66.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 61

................Octane Requirement . 260...............................Oxygenated . 261

........................Tank, Refueling . 261

Index

IND

EX

E

F

III

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：１９　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４１２　

...............................Fuel Economy . 268....Fuel Economy (ECO) Indicator . 59

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 372

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 382Ignition

..............................................Keys . 76

...........................................Switch . 78............Timing Control System . 395

........................Immobilizer System . 77.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

.........................................Indicators . 56...............ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 58

Brake (Parking and Brake............................System) . 57, 371

................Charging System . 56, 369.............................Cruise Control . 62

.................................Cruise Main . 62DRL (Daytime Running

......................................Lights) . 61...................................Fog Lights . 62

............Fuel Economy Indicator . 59...................................High Beam . 61

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 62.....................................Lights On . 60......................................Low Fuel . 61

................Low Oil Pressure . 56, 369......................Low Tire Pressure . 59

...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 370..........................Security System . 61...........................Side Airbag Off . 57

.......................................Seat Belt . 56...............................................SRS . 57.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 329

...........................HandsFreeLink . 231..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 73

........................................Headlights . 69........................................Aiming . 329

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 71

..............Automatic Lighting On . 70............Daytime Running Lights . 71

..................High Beam Indicator . 61.........................Reminder Chime . 69

Replacing Halogen..............................Bulbs . 329, 336

...................................Turning on . 69........................Head Restraints . 13, 94

.....................Heating and Cooling . 120.............................Heated Mirrors . 102

...................................Heater, Seat . 100HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 226........Hood, Opening and Closing . 264

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 327

......Gas Mileage, Improving . 268, 269.........................................Gasoline . 260...........................................Gauge . 66

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 61................Octane Requirement . 260

........................Tank, Refueling . 261................Gas Station Procedures . 261

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 66

...............................................Fuel . 66Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 284..............Manual Transmission . 282

......................................Glove Box . 113Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

.............................(GVWR) . 275, 299

Index

G

H

I

IV

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：２４　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４１３　

CONTINUED

Indicators...........................................TPMS . 59

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 60

............................VSA Activation . 58.................................VSA System . 58

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 56...............................Infant Restraint . 38

......................................Infant Seats . 38..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 343........................Information Display . 64

.................................Inside Mirror . 101.............................Inspection, Tire . 345

....................Installing a Child Seat . 41..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46

.............................Using LATCH . 42............................Instrument Panel . 55

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 72..............Instruments and Controls . 53

...............................Interior Lights . 116........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 358

.......................................Jack, Tire . 358................................Jump Starting . 364

..................................................Keys . 76

.......................Label, Certification . 382.................Lane Change, Signaling . 69

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19...............................LATCH System . 42

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 329

.......................................Indicator . 55.........................................Parking . 69

............................Turn Signal . 60, 69......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 78

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 78

..........................Childproof Door . 86............................Fuel Fill Door . 261

..................................Glove Box . 113....................Lockout Prevention . 80

.................................Power Door . 79

...........................................Trunk . 90........................Low Coolant Level . 267.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 61

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 282...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 56, 369

................................Lower Anchors . 42Lubricant Specifications

..................................Chart . 384, 386...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 273

..................................Maintenance . 305........................................Minder . 307

Main Items and Sub..............................Items . 310, 313

Owner’s Maintenance...................................Checks . 312

.........................Minder Indicator . 62..........................................Safety . 306

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 370...................Manual Transmission . 282

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 325.........................Meters, Gauges . 55, 63

Index

IND

EXJ

K

L

M

V

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：３１　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４１４　

...................Neutral Gear Position . 285..................New Vehicle Break-in . 260

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 283...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 382

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 260.........................................Odometer . 64

Oil........................Change, How to . 318......................Change, When to . 307......................Checking Engine . 266..............Pressure Indicator . 56, 369

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 317

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 78

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 394

............................Outside Mirrors . 101....Outside Temperature Indicator . 65

....................Overheating, Engine . 367....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 312

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 261

..............Panel Brightness Control . 72........................Park Gear Position . 285

...........................................Parking . 289...............................Parking Brake . 109

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 57, 371

.................................Parking Lights . 69..Parking Over Things that Burn . 396....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 30

.............................PGM-FI System . 395...................................Pollen Filter . 339

..........................Power Door Locks . 79................Power Seat Adjustments . 92

...............Power Socket Locations . 111............................Power Windows . 103

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16........................Protecting Children . 33

.....................General Guidelines . 33.......................Protecting Infants . 38

.......Protecting Larger Children . 47.........Protecting Small Children . 39

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 46

.............................Using LATCH . 42

...................Radiator Overheating . 367.............Radio/CD Sound System . 133

.................Radio Theft Protection . 213...........................Readiness Codes . 397

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 334..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 97

..........................Rear View Mirror . 101.................Rear Window Defogger . 74.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 92, 93

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 283........................................Refueling . 261

....................Methanol in Gasoline .261........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 101

.........Modifications Your Vehicle . 272.......................................Moonroof . 107

Index

N

O

P

R

VI

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：３８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４１５　

＊

＊

CONTINUED

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 402

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 52

..............................Safety Messages . iii...............Satellite Radio, XM . 157, 187

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18...............Additional Information . 18

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

.....................................Cleaning . 338................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 19

................................Maintenance . 20Reminder Indicator and

................................Beeper . 18, 56...................System Components . 18

...............Use During Pregnancy . 16...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

Seats.................................Adjusting . 92-94

.........................................Folding . 97

.......................................Heaters . 100............................Security System . 217

.........................Select/Reset Knob . 63.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 40

...Selector Knob (Disc Changer) . 149...............................Serial Number . 382..............................Service Minder . 307

...........................Service Manual . 403.........Service Station Procedures . 261

..........................Setting the Clock . 214...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 284

........................Shift Lock Release . 287................................Side Airbags . 9, 27

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 29

..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 28How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 28...............................Signaling Turns . 69

.....................................Snow Tires . 349................................Sound System . 133

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 356

....................Specifications . 385, 387............................Spark Plugs . 384, 386

........................Specifications . 384, 386

................................Speed Control . 223

........................Speed Limiter . 283, 287...................................Speedometer . 63

.......................Reminder Indicators . 56

.......................Remote Transmitter . 86Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 318..........................................Fuses . 372

................................Light Bulbs . 329

................................Timing Belt . 328...........................................Tires . 348

.............................Wiper Blades . 340Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 20.........Reserve Tank, Coolant . 267, 320

...............................Restraint, Child . 33..................Reverse Gear Position . 285

................................Rotation, Tire . 347

Index

IND

EX

S

VII

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：４３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４１６　

..........SRS, Additional Information . 21...Additional Safety Precautions . 31

.............................Airbag Service . 31......Airbag System Components . 21

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29How Your Front Airbags

.......................................Works . 23.How Your Side Airbags Works . 27

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 28

.............................SRS Indicator . 29, 57....START (Ignition Key Position) . 78

.......................Starting the Engine . 281In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 281................With a Dead Battery . 364

........Steam Coming from Engine . 367Steering Wheel

................................Adjustments . 75.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 78

.......Steering Wheel Buttons . 211, 232...................Stereo Sound System . 133

......................................Sun Visors . 114........................Sunglasses Holder . 113

Supplemental Restraint..................................System . 9, 21......................................Servicing . 31

.........................SRS Indicator . 29, 57...................System Components . 21

..................................Synthetic Oil . 317

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 355Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 388.....Emissions Control Systems . 394

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 396

.......................Temperature Gauge . 66....................Temperature, Outside . 65

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46................Theft Protection, Radio . 213

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 396..........................Time, Setting the . 214

....................................Timing Belt . 328

....................................Tire Chains . 349.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 357

...........................Tire Information . 390.................................Tire Labeling . 390

Tire Pressure Monitoring............System (TPMS) . 295, 392

Low Tire Pressure...........................Indicator . 59, 295

Required Federal............................Explanation . 392

..................TPMS Indicator . 59, 296...............................................Tires . 343

..............................Air Pressure . 344........................................Chains . 349

.........................Checking Wear . 345..........................Compact Spare . 356

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 388......................................Inflation . 343

..................................Inspection . 345...................................Replacing . 348

......................................Rotating . 347................................Service Life . 346

...........................................Snow . 349....................Specifications . 385, 387

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 357

Index

T

VIII

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：４７　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４１７　

＊

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 298

................Emergency Wrecker . 379.............................Weight Limit . 298

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 323Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 325..................Fluid Selection . 324, 325

..............Identification Number . 383.............Shifting the Automatic . 284

..................Shifting the Manual . 282.....................................Treadwear . 345.......................................Trip Meter . 65

................................................Trunk . 90....................Emergency Opener . 91

.................................Opening the . 90..............................Open Monitor . 60

....................................Turn Signals . 69

Unexpected, Taking Care of...............................................the . 355

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 388

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 260.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 319

................................Vanity Mirror . 115.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 274

.............Vehicle Dimensions . 384, 386....Vehicle Identification Number . 382

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 293

...VSA Activation Indicator . 58, 293.........................VSA Off Switch . 294

........VSA System Indicator . 58, 293.............................Vehicle Storage . 352

.............................Ventilation . 122, 128.................................................VIN . 382

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 317...........Voice Control System . 126, 174

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 52

..................Warranty Coverages . 401

Washers, Windshield........Checking the Fluid Level . 322

.......................................Indicator . 62.....................................Operation . 68

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 75............Alignment and Balance . 346

..........................Compact Spare . 356..............................Wrench, Nut . 358

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 104

................Operating the Power . 103...........................Rear, Defogger . 74

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 68...........................Defroster . 124, 129

.......................................Washers . 68Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 340.....................................Operation . 68

....................................Worn Tires . 345.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 379

Index

IND

EX

U

V

W

IX

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：５２　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４１８　

＊

................XM Satellite Radio . 157, 187

U.S. only

Index

X

:

X

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：５６　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４１９　

０７／０６／１５　１２：０３：５８　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４２０　

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):Manual Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Spare Tire Pressure:4.4 US qt (4.2 )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )2.0 US qt (1.9 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front/Rear:30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) (see page

).

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

18.5 US gal (70.0 )

2.4 engine models

V6 models

LX

EX and EX-L

V6

324

316

325

328

326

０７／０６／１５　１２：０４：１３　３１ＴＡ０６００　０４２１　

Documents

2008 Accord Sedan - Service Express